Contents
Introduction ...................................2
AV Receiver
Connection ..................................23
First Time Setup ..........................52
Basic Operation...........................70
Using the Listening Modes ........81
Advanced Setup ..........................92
NET/USB (TX-NR906 only)........121
Zone 2 and Zone 3.....................130
Controlling Other Components ..137
Others.........................................142
TX-SR876
TX-NR906
Instruction Manual
Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV Receiver.
Please read this manual thoroughly before making
connections and plugging in the unit.
Following the instructions in this manual will enable
you to obtain optimum performance and listening
enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.
Please retain this manual for future reference.
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use
only, recording copyrighted material is illegal with-
out the permission of the copyright holder.
For U.S. models
FCC Information for User
CAUTION:
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-
serviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact
your Onkyo dealer.
The user changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft
cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild deter-
gent and water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards
with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thin-
ners, alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because
they may damage the finish or remove the panel let-
tering.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accor-
dance with the instructions, may cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
4. Power
WARNING
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SEC-
TION CAREFULLY.
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the
voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel
(e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit
from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug
is readily operable (easily accessible) at all times.
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dif-
ferent from that to which the receiver is connected.
For North American model
Pressing the [ON/STANDBY] button to select
Standby mode does not fully shutdown the unit. If
you do not intend to use the unit for an extended
period, remove the power cord from the AC outlet.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV techni-
cian for help.
5. Preventing Hearing Loss
Caution
For Canadian Models
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.
For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,
FULLY INSERT.
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and head-
phones can cause hearing loss.
6. Batteries and Heat Exposure
Warning
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall
not be exposed to excessive heat as sunshine, fire or
the like.
7. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands
are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets
inside this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo
dealer.
Modèle canadien
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE
LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME
NMB-003 DU CANADA.
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-
TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRE-
SPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQU’AU FOND.
8. Handling Notes
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original
packaging to pack it how it was when you origi-
nally bought it.
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit
for a long time, because they may leave marks on
the case.
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm
after prolonged use. This is normal.
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may
not work properly the next time you turn it on, so
be sure to use it occasionally.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions—Continued
For British models
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power
supply cord of this unit should be performed only by
qualified service personnel.
IMPORTANT
The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance
with the following code:
Blue:
Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured mark-
ings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as
follows:
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured black.
The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter L or
coloured red.
IMPORTANT
The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse
needs to be replaced, the replacement fuse must
approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the
same ampere rating as that indicated on the plug. Check
for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the
fuse.
If the power cord’s plug is not suitable for your socket
outlets, cut it off and fit a suitable plug. Fit a suitable
fuse in the plug.
For European Models
Declaration of Conformity
We,
ONKYO EUROPE
ELECTRONICS GmbH
LIEGNITZERSTRASSE 6,
82194 GROEBENZELL,
GERMANY
declare in own responsibility, that the ONKYO product
described in this instruction manual is in compliance with the
corresponding
technical standards such as EN60065,
EN55013, EN55020 and EN61000-3-2, -3-3.
GROEBENZELL, GERMANY
K. MIYAGI
ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Listening to HD Radio™ Stations
Connecting a Satellite, Cable,
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT
Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components
Using the Remote Controller in Zone 2/3
Selecting the Language used for the onscreen setup
®
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features
®
*12
•
Audyssey MultEQ XT to Correct Room Acoustic
Problems
Amplifier
• 140 Watts/Channel (2ch Driven) @ 8 ohms (FTC)
• 200 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (IEC)
™*12
• Audyssey Dynamic EQ
Loudness Correction
™*12
• Audyssey Dynamic Volume
• 250 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (JEITA)
• Indepedent Crossover Adjustment
• WRAT-Wide Range Amplifier Technology
(5 Hz-100 kHz bandwidth)
(40/50/60/70/80/90/100/120/150/200 Hz)
*13
• Music Optimizer for Compressed Music Files
• VLSC (Vector Linear Shaping Circuitry)
• ISF (Imaging Science Foundation) Video Calibration
• Newly Designed GUI for System Set-up
• Compatible with RI Dock for iPod
• Parallel Push-Pull Amplifier Design with 3-Step
Inverted Darlington Circuitry
• H.C.P.S. (High Current Power Supply) Massive High
Power Transformer
• Preprogrammed u-Compatible Remote with 3 Mac-
ros and Mode-Key LEDs
Processing
TX-NR906 Only
• HDMI Audio and Video Processing (Deep Color,
x.v.Color, Lip Sync, DTS -HD Master Audio,
DTS-HD High Resolusion Audio, Dolby TrueHD ,
Dolby Digital Plus, SA-CD and Multi-CH PCM)
*1
• Microsoft Plays For Sure Certified for Windows Vista
*2
• Network Capability for Streaming Audio Files and
Internet Radio (vTuner Portal)
*3
• USB Port for a Mass USB Strage Device (Audio
Only)
• THX Ultra2 Plus Certified
• HQV-Reon-VX Video Processing with 1080p Video
Upscaling of All Video Sources via HDMI
*1
• Component Video Upconversion
• Burr-Brown 192 kHz/24-bit D/A Converters
• Three-TI (Aureus) 32-Bit DSP Chips
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535 &
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending.
DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol,
DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademarks of DTS,
Inc. ©1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
*4
• Neural Surround , THX-Neural
*5
• Theater-Dimensional virtual surround sound
• DSD Direct
*6
• Re-EQ function
*2
Connections
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
*7
• 4 HDMI Inputs and 2 Outputs
• Onkyo
for System Control
*3
• 6 Digital Inputs (3 Optical / 3 Coaxial),
1 Output (Optical)
THX and Ultra2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX may be
registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. Surround
EX is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with permis-
sion.
• 5 S-Video Inputs / 2 Outputs
• Component Video Switching (3 Inputs/1 Output)
*8
• Banana Plug-Compatible Speaker Posts
*4
• Powered Zone 2 and Zone 2 and Zone 3 Pre Out
• IR Input/Output and 12 V Trigger
• RS232 Port for Interface Control
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Cor-
poration, THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be reg-
istered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
• Bi-Amping and BTL Capability
*5
Miscellaneous
Theater-Dimensional is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.
*9
*10
*6 Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of THX
• SIRIUS Ready / XM Ready with XMHD Sur-
round (North American models only)
Ltd.
*11
*7
• HD Radio reception (North American models
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Inter-
face are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licens-
ing, LLC.
only)
• 40 SIRIUS/XM/AM/FM Presets (North American
models)
• 40 AM/FM Presets (European and Asian models)
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Supplied Accessories
Make sure you have the following accessories:
*8 In Europe, using banana plugs to connect speakers to an audio
amplifier is prohibited.
*9
©2005 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “SIRIUS”, SiriusConnect,
the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks
of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. Available only in the contiguous
United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
Remote controller and three batteries (AA/R6)
*10
®
XM Ready is a trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. ©2005
XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.
*11
Speaker setup microphone
Indoor FM antenna
™
HD Radio Technology Manufactured Under License From
iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents.
HD Radio™ and the HD Radio logo are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp.
*12
Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories. U.S.
®
and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ XT,
™
™
Audyssey Dynamic Volume , and Audyssey Dynamic EQ
are trademark of Audyssey Laboratories.
*13 Music Optimizer™ is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.
AM loop antenna
THX Ultra2 Plus
Before any home theater component can be THX
Ultra2 Plus certified, it must pass a rigorous series of
quality and performance tests. Only then can a prod-
uct feature the THX Ultra2 Plus logo, which is your
guarantee that the Home Theater products you pur-
chase will give you superb performance for many
years to come. THX Ultra2 Plus requirements define
hundreds of parameters, including power amplifier
performance, and pre-amplifier performance and
operation for both digital and analog domains. THX
Ultra2 Plus receivers also feature proprietary THX
technologies (e.g., THX Mode) which accurately
translate movie soundtracks for home theater play-
back.
Power cord
(Power cord varies from country to country.)
1
2
3
Speaker Cable
Speaker cable labels
*
*
*
“Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.
“Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.
Apple and iPod are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
*
In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the product
name indicates the color. Specifications and operation are the
same regardless of color.
*
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corpora-
tion, and is intended for home and other limited con-
sumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is pro-
hibited.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiroom Capability
You can use four speaker systems with this AV receiver—Speakers A: a surround-sound speaker system (up to 7.1
channels) for enjoying DVD movies in your main room, Speakers B: a pair of stereo speakers for serious music listen-
ing in your main room, Zone 2: a stereo speaker system in a second room, Zone 3: a stereo speaker system in a third
room. And, you can select a different audio source for each room.
*Can be used with the subwoofer, center, surround, or surround back speakers as required (see page 98).
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.
*External power amplifier required if Speakers B is used.
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.
*External power amplifier required.
Main Room: Speakers A and Speakers B
Front Speakers B
Surround back left and right
speakers
*
Front Speakers A
While Powered Zone 2 is being
used, nothing is output by these
Subwoofer
*
Center speaker
*
Surround left and right speakers
*
Can be used with Speakers A
and Speakers B.
*
Zone 2 Room
Zone 3 Room
Left and right
stereo speakers
Left and right
stereo speakers
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front & Rear Panels
Front Panel
1
2
3 4 5
6
7
8
Push here to open
the flap
9
bk
bl
TX-NR906 only
Front flap
The actual front panel has various logos printed on it. They are not shown here for clarity.
The page numbers in parentheses show where you can find the main explanation for each item.
Sets the AV receiver to On or Standby.
Selects the Pure Audio listening mode. The indica-
tor lights up when this mode is selected. Pressing
this button again selects the previous listening
mode.
Lights up when the AV receiver is on Standby and
flashes while a signal is being received from the
remote controller.
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or
multichannel.
This indicator lights up when Zone 2 is selected.
Select the following input sources: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1,
AUX 2, TAPE, TUNER, CD, PHONO, NET/USB
(TX-NR906 only).
This indicator lights up when Zone 3 is selected.
Receives control signals from the remote controller.
f Display
Displays various information about the currently
selected input source.
Sets the volume of the AV receiver to −∞ dB,
–81.5 dB through +18.0 dB (relative display).
The volume level can also be displayed as an abso-
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
North American model
cp TX-NR906 only
cq cr
bm
bn bo bp bq br bs bt ck cl cm cn co
cs ct dk
Other models
TX-NR906 only
cp
dl
bt
The page numbers in parentheses show where you can find the main explanation for each item.
v SETUP button
This 1/4-inch phone jack is for connecting a stan-
This button is used to access the onscreen setup
dard pair of stereo headphones for private listening.
menus that appear on the connected TV.
The ZONE 2 button is used when setting Zone 2.
The ZONE 3 button is used when setting Zone 3.
The OFF button is used to turn off Zone 2 or Zone 3.
w TUNING, PRESET, Arrow, and ENTER
buttons
When the AM or FM input source is selected, the
TUNING [q]/[w] buttons are used to tune the tuner,
radio presets (see page 75).
Used when adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3.
When the onscreen setup menus are used, they work
as arrow buttons and are used to select and set
items. The [ENTER] button is also used with the
onscreen setup menus.
Used to adjust the tone (bass and treble).
Used to set the “Monitor Out” setting.
x RETURN button
Selects the previously displayed onscreen setup
menu.
Selects the Stereo listening mode.
y USB port (TX-NR906 only)
Selects the THX listening modes.
A USB mass storage device, such as a USB flash
drive or MP3 player, containing music files (MP3,
WMA, WAV, AAC) can be plugged in here and the
music selected and played through the AV receiver.
This button is used to adjust the display brightness.
Other models, this is the [RT/PTY/TP] button, and
it’s for RDS (Radio Data System). See “Using
The included speaker setup microphone is con-
nected here for automatic speaker setup.
Used when storing or deleting radio presets.
Used to connect a camcorder, game console, and so
on. There are input jacks for optical digital audio,
S-Video, composite video, and analog audio.
Selects the Auto or Manual tuning mode.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used to adjust the tone, and the volume and balance
of Zone 2 and Zone 3.
Select the Onkyo original listening modes.
American models do not have this switch.
Used to assign digital inputs to input selectors.
This is the main power switch. When set to OFF,
the AV receiver is completely shutdown. It must be
set to ON to set the AV receiver to On or Standby.
Display
7
1 2 3 4 5
6
8
9
bk
bl
bm
bn
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
Indicate the speaker configuration and channels
used by the current input source.
up if the current AM or FM station supports HD
Radio technology.
: A box is displayed for each speaker that’s set
in the Speaker Configuration. No box appears for
speakers that are set to No or None.
SPS (North American model only) (79):
Lights up when tuned to a HD Radio station that’s
transmitting secondary multicast channels.
The following abbreviations indicate which audio
channels are included in the current input signal.
RDS (77): Lights up when tuned to a radio station
that supports RDS (Radio Data System).
FL: Front left
C:
Center
selected for AM or FM radio. Goes off when Man-
ual Tuning mode is selected.
FR: Front right
SL: Surround left
LFE: Subwoofer (Low Frequency Effects)
SR: Surround right
SBL: Surround back left
SB: Surround back
TUNED (73): Lights up when tuned to a radio sta-
tion.
SBR: Surround back right
reo FM station.
Lights up when the “Speaker Type” setting is set to
“BTL” for bridged front speaker operation.
Lights up when the Sleep function has been set.
Indicate which speaker set is selected: A or B.
Flashes during automatic speaker setup. Lights up
when the “Equalizer Settings” is set to “Audyssey”.
Lights up when Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Lights up when a pair of headphones are plugged
into the PHONES jack.
Show the selected listening mode and audio input
signal format.
j Message area
Displays various information.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indicate the type of audio input that’s selected as the
Displays the volume level.
audio source: HDMI, ANALOG, or DIGITAL.
While a digital HD Radio transmission is being
received, the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an
analog HD Radio transmission is being received,
the ANALOG indicator lights up.
Flashes while the AV receiver is muted.
Rear Panel
North American model
1
1 2
3
4
5
67
8
9 bl bn
bo bp
bq
br
bs bt ck
cl cm cn co cpcq cr cs ct
dk
dl dm
*1 TX-NR906 only
dn
1
Other models
bk bm
bo
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a u REMOTE CONTROL
m IR IN/OUT
A commercially available IR receiver can be con-
This u (Remote Interactive) jack can be con-
nected to the u jack on another u-capable
Onkyo component for remote and system control.
nected to the IR IN jack, allowing you to control the
AV receiver while you’re in Zone 2, or control it
when it’s out of sight, for example, installed in a
cabinet.
To use u, you must make an analog audio connec-
tion (RCA) between the AV receiver and the other
component, even if they are connected digitally.
A commercially available IR emitter can be con-
nected to the IR OUT jack to pass IR (infrared)
remote control signals through to other components.
b RS232
n ETHERNET port (TX-NR906 only)
This port is for connecting the AV receiver to your
Ethernet network (e.g., router or switch) for playing
music files on a networked computer or media
server, or for listening to Internet radio.
c PHONO IN
This audio input is for connecting a turntable.
d COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1, 2, and 3
These RCA component video inputs are for con-
necting components with a component video out-
put, such as a DVD player, DVD recorder, or DVR
(digital video recorder). They’re assignable, which
means you can assign each one to an input selector
to suit your setup. See “Component Video Setup”
o 12V TRIGGER OUT ZONE 2
This output can be connected to the 12-volt trigger
input on a component in Zone 2. When Zone 2 is
turned on, a 12-volt trigger signal is output.
p AM and FM ANTENNA (HD Radio reception)
(on North American model)
e COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
This RCA component video output is for connect-
ing a TV or projector with a component video input.
The AM push terminals are for connecting an AM
antenna. The FM jack is for connecting an FM
antenna.
f HDMI IN 1–4, OUT MAIN, and OUT SUB
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) con-
nections carry digital audio and digital video.
q AC INLET
The supplied power cord is connected here. The
other end of the power cord should be connected to
a suitable wall outlet.
The HDMI inputs are for connecting components
with an HDMI output, such as a DVD player, DVD
recorder, or DVR (digital video recorder). They’re
assignable, which means you can assign each one to
an input selector to suit your setup. See “Video
r DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1, 2, and 3
These coaxial digital audio inputs are for connect-
ing components with a coaxial digital audio output,
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign-
able, which means you can assign each one to an
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Audio
The HDMI outputs are for connecting a TV or pro-
jector with an HDMI input.
g SIRIUS antenna (on North American model)
This jack is for connecting a SIRIUS digital
antenna, sold separately (see the separate SIRIUS
instructions).
s DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1, 2, and OUT
These optical digital audio inputs are for connecting
components with an optical digital audio output,
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign-
able, which means you can assign each one to an
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Audio
h XM antenna (on North American model)
This jack is for connecting an XM Mini-Tuner and
Home Dock, sold separately (see the separate XM
instructions).
The optical digital audio output is for connecting a
digital recorder with an optical digital input, such as
a CD recorder.
i MONITOR OUT
The S-Video or composite video jack should be
connected to a video input on your TV or projector.
t GND screw
This screw is for connecting a turntable’s ground
wire.
j AM ANTENNA (not North American model)
These push terminals are for connecting an AM
antenna.
u CD IN
This analog audio input is for connecting a CD
player’s analog audio output.
k ZONE 2 OUT
This composite video output can be connected to a
video input on a TV in Zone 2.
l FM ANTENNA (not North American model)
This jack is for connecting an FM antenna.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v TAPE IN/OUT
dl PRE OUT: ZONE 2, ZONE 3 L/R
These analog audio input and output jacks are for
connecting a recorder with an analog audio input
and output, such as a cassette deck, MD recorder,
etc.
These analog audio outputs can be connected to the
line inputs on amplifiers in Zone 2 and Zone 3.
dm ZONE 2 L/R speakers
These terminal posts are for connecting speakers in
Zone 2 or front Speakers B.
w AUX 1 IN
A VCR for playback only or other video source can
be connected here. There’s S-Video and composite
video input jacks for connecting the video signal.
The ZONE 2 L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal
posts can be used with front Speakers B and sur-
round back speakers, respectively, or used to bi-amp
or bridge front Speakers B. See “Bi-amping Front
x GAME/TV IN
A game console or TV output can be connected
here. There’s S-Video and composite video input
jacks for connecting the video signal.
dn AC OUTLET (North American model only)
These switched AC outlets can be used to supply
power to other AV components. The type and num-
ber of outlets depends on the country in which you
purchased your AV receiver.
y CBL/SAT IN
A cable or satellite receiver can be connected here.
There’s S-Video and composite video input jacks
for connecting the video signal.
z VCR/DVR IN/OUT
A video component, such as a VCR or DVR, can be
connected here for recording and playback. There’s
S-Video and composite video input and output jacks
for connecting the video signal.
cr DVD IN
This input is for connecting a DVD player. There’s
S-Video and composite video input jacks for con-
necting the video signal.
cs FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, and SURR
BACK L/R speakers
These terminal posts are for connecting the front
Speakers A, center, surround, and surround back
speakers.
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal
posts can be used with front Speakers A and sur-
round back speakers, respectively, or used to bi-amp
or bridge front Speakers A. See “Bi-amping Front
ct MULTI CH input: FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK
L/R
This analog multichannel input is for connecting a
component with a 5.1/7.1-channel analog audio out-
put, such as a DVD player, DVD-Audio or
SACD-capable player, or an MPEG decoder.
dk PRE OUT: FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK
L/R
This 5.1/7.1 multichannel analog audio output can
be connected to the analog audio input on a multi-
channel power amplifier for when you want to use
the AV receiver solely as a preamplifier. The SUB-
WOOFER jack is for connecting a powered sub-
woofer.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller
Installing the Batteries
Aiming the Remote Controller
When using the remote controller, point it toward the AV
receiver’s remote control sensor, as shown below.
To open the battery compartment, press
the small hollow and slide open the cover.
1
Remote control sensor
STANDBY indicator
AV receiver
30˚
30˚
Insert the three supplied batteries (AA/R6)
2
in accordance with the polarity diagram
inside the battery compartment.
Approx. 16 ft.
(5 m)
Notes:
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
receiver is subjected to bright light, such as direct sun-
light or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Keep this in
mind when installing.
• If another remote controller of the same type is used in
the same room, or the AV receiver is installed close to
equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote control-
ler may not work reliably.
Slide the cover shut.
3
• Don’t put anything on top of the remote controller,
such as a book or magazine, because a button may be
pressed continuously, thereby draining the batteries.
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
receiver is installed in a rack behind colored glass
doors. Keep this in mind when installing.
• The remote controller will not work if there’s an
obstacle between it and the AV receiver’s remote con-
trol sensor.
Notes:
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try
replacing the batteries.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of
batteries.
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long
time, remove the batteries to prevent damage from
leakage or corrosion.
• Expired batteries should be removed as soon as possi-
ble to prevent damage from leakage or corrosion.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the Remote Controller Modes
RECEIVER/TAPE Mode
As well as the AV receiver, you can also use the remote
controller to control your other AV components. The
remote controller has a specific operating mode for use
with each type of component. Modes are selected by
using the REMOTE MODE buttons.
RECEIVER/TAPE mode is used to control the AV
receiver. It can also be used to control an Onkyo cassette
recorder connected via u.
To set the remote controller to RECEIVER/TAPE
mode, press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE
button.
■ RECEIVER/TAPE Mode
In RECEIVER/TAPE mode, you can control the AV
receiver and an Onkyo cassette recorder connected via
u.
1
ON
STANDBY
TV
■ DVD Mode
INPUT
2
3
By default, you can control an Onkyo DVD player in this
mode. By entering the appropriate remote control code,
you can control components made by other manufactur-
ers (see page 137).
bm
bn
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX2
6
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
■ CD/CDR/MD Mode
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
By default, you can control an Onkyo CD player in this
mode. By entering the appropriate remote control code,
you can control a CD player, MD recorder, or CD
recorder made by another manufacturer (see page 137).
+10
CLEAR
0
-- --- 10
11
12
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
1
*
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
4
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
CDR/MD/DOCK
■ DOCK Mode
RECEIVER
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
bo
bp
This mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an Onkyo
RI Dock. You must enter the appropriate remote control
TAPE/AMP
DIMMER
TX-SR876
(RC-690M)
5
6
+
■ NET/USB Mode (TX-NR906 only)
This mode is for playing music files on a networked
computer, media server, or USB mass storage device, or
for listening to Internet radio.
DOCK
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
7
bq
br
bs
-
8
9
PREV
CH
■ TV and VCR Modes
DISPLAY
MUTING
With these modes, you can control a TV and VCR. You
must enter the appropriate remote control code first (see
1
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
■ CABLE/SAT Mode
1
SP A
SP B
*
bt
LISTENING MODE
SURR
In CABLE/SAT mode, you can control a cable or satel-
lite TV receiver. You must enter the appropriate remote
control code first (see page 137).
STEREO
REPEAT
PURE A
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
bk
bl
THX
ALL ST
■ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 Modes
These modes are for controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
L NIGHT
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
ck
cl
VCR
RC-687
M
Use the REMOTE MODE buttons to select
a mode.
cm
1
*1 TX-NR906 only (RC-687M)
Use the buttons supported by that mode
2
to control the component.
RECEIVER/TAPE mode: see right column
Note:
Some of the remote controller functions described in this
manual may not work as expected with other compo-
nents.
NET/USB mode (TX-NR906 only):
see page 21
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
Turns the Re-EQ function on or off.
Sets the AV receiver to Standby.
Turns the Late Night function on or off.
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or
multichannel.
Turns on the AV receiver.
Used to select the input source.
Used with the Macro function.
■ TAPE mode
On twin cassette decks, only Deck B can be controlled.
Adjusts the display brightness.
1 Previous and Next [7]/[6] buttons
The Previous [7] button selects the previous
track. During playback it selects the beginning of
the current track. The Next [6] button selects the
next track.
f Arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and ENTER buttons
Used to select and adjust settings.
Selects radio presets.
Depending on how they were recorded, the Previous
and Next [7]/[6] buttons may not work prop-
erly with some cassette tapes.
h SETUP button
Used to change settings.
Play [1] button
Displays information about the current input source.
Starts playback.
Rewind and Fast Forward [5]/[4]
buttons
Used to select the listening modes. The [STEREO],
[SURR], and LISTENING MODE [e]/[r] buttons
can be used at any time, regardless of the currently
selected remote controller mode.
The Rewind [5] button starts rewind. The Fast
Forward [4] button starts fast forward.
Reverse Play [t] button
k TEST TONE, CH SEL, LEVEL–, and LEVEL+
Starts reverse playback.
Used to adjust the level of each speaker.
Stop [2] button
Stops playback.
l LIGHT button
Turns the remote controller’s illuminated buttons on
or off.
REC [y] button
Starts recording.
Selects the Direct tuning mode for radio.
Used to select the remote controller modes. When
you press a button, the REMOTE MODE button for
the currently selected mode lights up.
Used with the Sleep function.
Adjusts the volume of the AV receiver regardless of
the currently selected remote controller mode.
q RETURN button
Returns to the previous display when changing set-
tings.
Mutes or unmutes the AV receiver.
s SP A and SP B buttons (TX-NR906 only)
Used to select Speakers A or Speakers B.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a STANDBY button
DVD Mode
Sets the DVD player to Standby.
To set the remote controller to DVD mode, press the
[DVD] REMOTE MODE button.
b ON button
Turns on the DVD player.
c Number buttons
Used to enter title, chapter, and track numbers, and
1
to enter times for locating specific points.
ON
STANDBY
TV
d TOP MENU button
INPUT
2
3
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
Selects a DVD’s top menu.
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
e Arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and ENTER buttons
AUX1
5
AUX2
6
Used to navigate menus and select items.
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
f DISC +/– button
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
Selects discs on a DVD changer.
+10
CLEAR
0
-- --- 10
11
12
/
bn
INPUT SELECTOR
g SETUP button
MACRO
Used to access the DVD player’s settings.
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
h DISPLAY button
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
CDR/MD/DOCK
Displays information about the current disc, title,
chapter, or track, including elapsed time, remaining
time, total time, and so on.
DVD
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
4
5
DIMMER
bo
i Playback buttons
From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Fast
Reverse, Pause, Stop, Fast Forward, Slow Reverse,
and Slow Forward.
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
6
-
bp
7
8
PREV
CH
j REPEAT button
Used with the repeat playback function.
DISPLAY
MUTING
k AUDIO button
9
Selects foreign language soundtracks and audio for-
mats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
bq
l OPEN/CLOSE [0] button
SP A
SP B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
Opens and closes the disc tray.
STEREO
REPEAT
PURE A
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
m CLEAR button
THX
ALL ST
bk
bl
br
bs
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
n MENU button
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
Displays a DVD’s menu.
AUDIO SEL
L NIGHT
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
bm
VCR
bt
o RETURN button
RC-687
M
Exits the DVD player’s onscreen setup menu.
p RANDOM button
Used with the random playback function.
q PLAY MODE button
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.
r SUBTITLE button
Selects subtitles.
s VIDEO OFF button
Turns off the internal video circuitry, eliminating
any possibility of interference.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a STANDBY button
CD/MD/CDR Modes
Sets the component to Standby.
To control an Onkyo CD player, MD recorder, or CD
recorder, or a CD or MD player/recorder made by
another manufacturer, press the [CD] REMOTE
MODE button to select the CD/MD/CDR remote con-
troller mode.
In order to control an Onkyo MD recorder or CD
recorder, or a component made by another manufacturer,
you must first enter the appropriate remote control code
b ON button
Set the component to On or Standby.
c Number buttons
Used to enter track numbers and times for locating
specific points.
d Arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and ENTER buttons
Used with some components.
e DISC +/– button
Selects discs on a CD changer.
f DISPLAY button
Displays information about the current disc or track,
including elapsed time, remaining time, total time,
and so on.
1
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
2
g Playback buttons
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Fast
Reverse, Pause, Stop, and Fast Forward.
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
3
AUX1
5
AUX2
6
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
h REC [y] button
Starts recording.
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
CLEAR
0
i REPEAT button
-- --- 10
11
12
/
INPUT SELECTOR
bl
Used with the repeat playback function.
MACRO
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
j OPEN/CLOSE [0] button
REMOTE MODE
CD
Opens or closes the disc tray or ejects the MiniDisc.
CD
DVD
VCR
ZONE
CDR/MD/DOCK
CDR/MD/CK
k CLEAR button
NET/USB
TV
CABLE
SAT
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.
DIMMER
l RETURN button
4
5
Used with some components.
+
CH
m RANDOM button
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
Used with the random playback function.
-
n PLAY MODE button
PREV
CH
6
7
8
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.
DISPLAY
MUTING
bm
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
bn
bo
SP A
SP B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
REPEAT
PURE A
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX
ALL ST
9
bk
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
L NIGHT
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
VCR
RC-687
M
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a STANDBY button
DOCK Mode
Turns off the iPod.
Dock mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an Onkyo
RI Dock.
b ON button*
Turns on the iPod.
To control an RI Dock, press the [CD] (TX-NR906) or
[DOCK] (TX-SR876) REMOTE MODE button to
select the DOCK remote controller mode.
In order to control an RI Dock, you must first enter the
appropriate remote control code (see page 137).
c TOP MENU button
Works as a Mode button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.
d Arrow [q]/[w] and ENTER buttons*
Used to navigate menus and select items.
When Using an RI Dock:
e ALBUM +/– button*
• Connect the RI Dock to the TAPE IN or AUX 1 IN
L/R jacks.
Selects the next or previous album.
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or
HDD/DOCK.
f DISPLAY button*
Turns on the backlight for 30 seconds.
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK” (see
g Previous [7] button
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the
previous song.
• See to the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more
information.
h Pause [3] button
Pauses playback. (With 3rd generation iPods, it
works as a Play/Pause button.)
1
ON
STANDBY
i Fast Reverse [5] button
TV
INPUT
2
Press and hold to fast reverse.
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
j PLAYLIST Up/Down [i]/[o] buttons*
Used to select the previous or next playlist on the
iPod.
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
TX-NR906
(RC-687M)
AUX1
5
AUX2
6
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
CD
k REPEAT button*
CDR/MD/DK
TV VOL
PHONO
D. TUN
NET/USB
Used with the repeat function.
+10
CLEAR
0
-- --- 10
11
12
/
INPUT SELECTOR
l MENU button*
MACRO
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
Used to access menus.
TX-SR876
(RC-690M)
REMOTE MODE
m Play [1] button
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
CDR/MD/DOCK
Starts playback. If the component is off, it will turn
on automatically. (With 3rd generation iPods, this
button works as a Play/Pause button.)
DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
NET/USB
DIMMER
3
4
bm
n Next [6] button
+
Selects the next song.
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
o Stop [2] button
5
-
Stops playback and displays a menu.
PREV
CH
p Fast Forward [4] button
6
bn
DISPLAY
MUTING
Press and hold to fast forward.
7
8
9
bo
bp
q RANDOM button*
Used with the shuffle function.
bq
br
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
r PLAY MODE button
SP A
SP B
bk
Used to select play modes on components with
selectable play modes.
Works as a Resume button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
REPEAT
PURE A
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX
ALL ST
bl
bs
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
L NIGHT
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
*
Buttons marked with an asterisk (*) are not supported by 3rd
generation iPods.
VCR
RC-687
M
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a Number buttons
NET/USB Mode (TX-NR906 only)
Used to enter track numbers.
NET/USB mode is for playing music files on a net-
worked computer, media server, or USB mass storage
device, or for listening to Internet radio.
b Arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and ENTER buttons
Used to navigate menus and select items.
c CH +/– button
To set the remote controller to NET/USB mode, press
the [NET/USB] REMOTE MODE button.
Used to select Internet radio stations.
d SETUP button
Displays the URL input screen for Internet radio.
e Previous [7] button
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the
previous song.
f Pause [3] button
Pauses playback of music stored on a USB mass
storage device.
ON
STANDBY
g REPEAT button
TV
INPUT
Used with the repeat playback function, which can
be used with music files on a networked computer,
media server, or USB mass storage device.
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
1
AUX1
5
AUX2
6
h RETURN button
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Returns to the previous display.
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
i Play [1] button
+10
CLEAR
0
-- --- 10
11
12
/
Starts playback.
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
j Next [6] button
REMOTE MODE
Selects the next song.
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB
k Stop [2] button
NET/USB
TV
CABLE
SAT
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
Stops playback.
DIMMER
l RANDOM button
2
Used with the random playback function, which can
be used with music files on a networked computer,
media server, or USB mass storage device.
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
3
4
-
8
PREV
CH
9
DISPLAY
MUTING
5
6
bk
bl
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
bm
SP A
SP B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
REPEAT
PURE A
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX
ALL ST
7
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
L NIGHT
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
VCR
RC-687
M
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About Home Theater
Enjoying Home Theater
Thanks to the AV receiver’s superb capabilities, you can enjoy surround sound with a real sense of movement in your
own home—just like being in a movie theater or concert hall. With DVDs you can enjoy DTS and Dolby Digital. With
analog or digital TV, you can enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS Neo:6, or Onkyo’s original DSP listening modes. You
can also enjoy THX Surround EX (THX-certified THX speaker system recommended).
Front left and right speakers
These output the main sound. Their role in a home theater is to provide a solid
anchor for the sound image. They should be positioned facing the listener at
about ear level, and equally spaced from the TV. Angle them inward slightly
so as to create a triangle, with the listener at the apex.
Surround left and right speakers
These speakers are used for precise
sound positioning and to add realistic
ambience.
Position them at the sides of the lis-
tener, or slightly behind, about
2–3 feet (60–100 cm) above ear
level. Ideally they should be equally
spaced from the listener.
Center speaker
This speaker enhances the front left
and right speakers, making sound
movements distinct and providing a
full sound image. For movies it’s used
mainly for dialog.
Position it close to your TV (preferably
on top) facing forward at about ear
level, or at the same height as the
front left and right speakers.
Subwoofer
The subwoofer handles the bass sounds of the
LFE (Low-Frequency Effects) channel. The
volume and quality of the bass output from
your subwoofer will depend on its position, the
shape of your listening room, and your listen-
ing position. In general, a good bass sound
can be obtained by installing the subwoofer in
a front corner, or at one-third the way along the
front wall, as shown.
Surround back left and right speakers
These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Digital
EX, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-ES Discrete, THX Surround
EX, etc. They enhance the realism of surround sound
and improve sound localization behind the listener. Posi-
tion them behind the listener about 2–3 feet
(60–100 cm) above ear level.
Tip: To find the best position for your sub-
woofer, while playing a movie or some music
with good bass, experiment by placing your
subwoofer at various positions within the room
and choose the one that provides the most
satisfying results.
Corner
position
1/3 of wall
position
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV Receiver
Connecting Your Speakers
About Speakers A and Speakers B (TX-NR906 only)
Speakers A and Speakers B allows you to have two speaker configurations of up to 7.1 speakers. Each configuration has
its own pair of stereo front speakers and can use the same subwoofer, center, surround, and surround back speakers, as
required. You could, for example, use Speakers A when watching a DVD movie with 7.1-channels surround sound and
use Speakers B for serious music listening with a pair of stereo speakers and the subwoofer (2.1-channels).
The speakers are configured by using the “Speaker Settings” on page 61 and “Speaker Setup” on page 95.
Front Speakers A and front Speakers B can be wired normally, bi-amped, or bridged, but A and B cannot be bi-amped
or bridged at the same time. For example, if front Speakers A are bridged, front Speakers B can only be wired normally.
Similarly, if front Speakers B are bi-amped, Speakers A can only be wired normally. When bridging is used, the AV
receiver can drive 2 speakers in the main room (2.1 speakers if you're using a powered subwoofer). When bi-amping is
used, the AV receiver can drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room. See pages 27–30 for more information.
The Speakers A and Speakers B configurations are selected by using the [SP A] and [SP B] buttons on the remote
controller. Only one configuration can be selected at a time.
The versatility offered by the Speakers A and Speakers B configurations means you can configure the AV receiver to
suit your exact requirements and application. Two typical applications are shown below.
■ 7.1-channel Playback with Speakers A and
Stereo Playback with Speakers B
■ 7.1-channel Playback with Bridged Front
Speakers
In this example, Speakers A provides 7.1-channel
surround sound for enjoying DVD movies, while
Speakers B is used for serious music listening with a
pair of top-quality stereo speakers.
In this example, Speakers A provides 7.1-channel
surround sound for enjoying DVD movies, while
Speakers B is bridged for use with a pair of high-
power stereo speakers, the subwoofer is used with
Speakers A and Speakers B.
Speakers B
Speakers B
FL
FR
FL
FR
FL
C
FR
FL
C
FR
Subwoofer
used with A
and B
Speakers A
Speakers A
SL
SBL
SR
SBR
SL
SBL
SR
SBR
2–1. Speaker Settings
Speaker impedance
Speaker Type
2–1. Speaker Settings
Speaker impedance
Speaker Type
6ohms
8ohms
Front(Speaker A)
Normal
Normal
Front(Speaker B)
Front(Speaker A)
Normal
BTL
Front(Speaker B)
2–2. Speaker Config
2–2. Speaker Config
Subwoofer
Use
Use
Use
Use
Use
Speaker A
Front
Subwoofer
Use
Use
Use
Use
Use
Speaker A
Center
Surround
SurrBack
Front
Center
Surround
SurrBack
2–2. Speaker Config
2–2. Speaker Config
Subwoofer
Front
Not Use
Use
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
Speaker B
Subwoofer
Front
Use
Use
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
Speaker B
Center
Surround
SurrBack
Center
Surround
SurrBack
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker Configuration
Connecting a Powered Subwoofer
For 7.1-channel surround-sound playback, you need
seven speakers and a powered subwoofer.
Using a suitable cable, connect the AV receiver’s PRE
OUT: SUBWOOFER to the input on your powered sub-
woofer. If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re
using an external amplifier, connect the PRE OUT:
SUBWOOFER to the amp’s input.
The following table shows which channels you should
use based on the number of speakers you have.
Number of speakers:
Front left
2
3
4
5
6
7
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
s
Front right
Center
Surround left
✓
✓
LINE INPUT
Surround right
Surround back*
Surround back left
Surround back right
✓
✓
LINE INPUT
*
If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the
SURR BACK L terminals.
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered sub-
woofer is recommended for a powerful and solid bass.
Attaching the Speaker Labels
To get the best from your surround-sound system, you
must set the speaker settings. You can do this automati-
The AV receiver’s positive (+) speaker terminals are
color-coded for ease of identification. (The negative (–)
speaker terminals are all black.)
Using Dipole Speakers
Speaker terminal
Front left, Zone 2 left
Front right, Zone 2 right
Center
Color
White
Red
You can use dipole speakers for the surround left and
right and surround back left and right speakers. Dipole
speakers output the same sound in two directions.
Green
Blue
Surround left
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them
to indicate how they should be positioned. The surround
left and right dipole speakers should be positioned so that
their arrows point toward your TV or screen, while the sur-
round back left and right dipolar speakers should be posi-
tioned so that their arrows point toward each other, as
shown.
Surround right
Gray
Brown
Tan
Surround back left
Surround back right
The supplied speaker labels are also color-coded and you
should attach them to the positive (+) side of each
speaker cable in accordance with the above table. All
you need to do then is to match the color of each label to
the corresponding speaker terminal.
Normal speakers
Dipole speakers
1
TV/screen
1
TV/screen
4
2
3
4
2
3
For North American model
• If you are using banana plugs, tighten the speaker ter-
minal before inserting the banana plug.
• Do not insert the speaker code directly into the center
hole of the speaker terminal.
5
6
5
6
7
8
7
8
1. Subwoofer
2. Front left speaker
3. Center speaker
6. Surround right speaker
7. Surround back left
speaker
4. Front right speaker
5. Surround left speaker
8. Surround back right
speaker
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker Connection Precautions
Connecting the Speaker Cables
Read the following before connecting your speakers:
• You can connect speakers with an impedance of
between 4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any of the
connected speakers is 4 ohms or more but less than 6,
be sure to set the speaker impedance to 4 ohms (see
page 61). If you use speakers with a lower impedance,
and use the amplifier at high volume levels for a long
period of time, the built-in amp protection circuit may
be activated.
Strip about 5/8"
5/8" (15 mm)
1
(15 mm) of insulation
from the ends of the
speaker cables, and
twist the bare wires
tightly, as shown.
Unscrew the terminal.
2
• Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before
making any connections.
• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.
Fully insert the bare wire.
3
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. Connect
positive (+) terminals to only positive (+) terminals,
and negative (–) terminals to only negative (–) termi-
nals. If you get them the wrong way around, the sound
will be out of phase and will sound unnatural.
Screw the terminal tight.
• Unnecessarily long or very thin speaker cables may
affect the sound quality and should be avoided.
4
• Be careful not to short the
positive and negative wires.
Doing so may damage the AV
receiver.
• Don’t connect more than one
cable to each speaker termi-
nal. Doing so may damage the
AV receiver.
• Don’t connect a speaker to several terminals.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ 7.1-channel Playback with Speakers A
The following illustration shows which speaker should be connected to each pair of terminals for 7.1-channel playback
with Speakers A.
If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK L terminals.
Front right speaker
Center speaker
Front left speaker
Surround back
right speaker
Surround right
speaker
Surround left
speaker
Surround back
left speaker
■ 7.1-channel Playback with Speakers A or Speakers B
The following illustration shows which speaker should be connected to each pair of terminals for up to 7.1-channel
playback with Speakers A or Speakers B.
If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK L terminals.
Front right
speaker A
Front left
speaker A
Center speaker
Front right
speaker B
Surround back Surround right
Surround left
speaker
Surround back
left speaker
Front left
speaker B
right speaker
speaker
Notes:
• When Speakers A is selected, the front left speaker A and front right speaker A become the main front speakers. When
Speakers B is selected, the front left speaker B and front right speaker B become the main front speakers.
• The speakers are configured by using the “Speaker Settings” on page 61 and “Speaker Setup” on page 95.
• You can choose which of the spakers you want to use with the Speakers A and Speakers B configurations (see
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bi-amping Speaker Hookup
Bi-amping Front Speakers A
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front Speakers A and surround back
speakers respectively, or bi-amped to provide separate
tweeter and woofer feeds for front Speakers A, providing
improved bass and treble performance.
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT R positive (+)
1
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) woofer
(low) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
FRONT R negative (–) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) terminal.
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK R posi-
2
• For bi-amping, the FRONT L/R terminal posts con-
nect to the front speakers’ tweeter terminals. And the
SURR BACK L/R terminal posts connect to the front
speakers’ woofer terminals.
tive (+) terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+)
tweeter (high) terminal. And connect the AV
receiver’s SURR BACK R negative (–) terminal
to the right speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high)
terminal.
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the “Speaker Type: Front(Speaker A)” setting to
“Bi-Amp” to enable bi-amping (see page 61).
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT L positive (+)
3
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) woofer
(low) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
FRONT L negative (–) terminal to the left
speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) terminal.
• When front Speakers A are biamped, front Speakers B
must be wired normally or not used.
Important:
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure
to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’
tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals.
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L posi-
4
tive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+)
tweeter (high) terminal. And connect the AV
receiver’s SURR BACK L negative (–) terminal to
the left speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) ter-
minal.
• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support
bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.
Tweeter (high)
Tweeter (high)
Woofer (low)
Right speaker
Woofer (low)
Left speaker
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bridged Speaker Hookup
Bridging Front Speakers A
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front speakers and surround back
speakers respectively, or bridged together to provide
almost double the output power for the front speakers.
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT R positive (+)
1
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) ter-
minal. And connect the AV receiver’s SURR
BACK R positive (+) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative terminal.
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive
2 speakers in the main room (2.1 speakers if you’re
using a powered subwoofer).
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT L positive (+)
2
• For bridging, the positive (+) FRONT L/R and SURR
BACK L/R terminal posts are used, but the negative
(–) FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminals are
not.
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) terminal.
And connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L
positive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s negative
terminal.
• Once you’ve completed the bridging connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the “Speaker Type: Front(Speaker A)” setting to
• When front Speakers A are bridged, front Speakers B
must be wired normally or not used.
Notes:
• Use only front speakers with an impedance of 8
ohms or higher for bridging. Failure to do so may
seriously damage the AV receiver.
• When using bridging, make sure that your front speak-
ers can handle the additional power.
Right speaker
Left speaker
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bi-amping Speaker Hookup
Bi-amping Front Speakers B
The ZONE 2 L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front Speakers B and surround back
speakers respectively, or bi-amped to provide separate
tweeter and woofer feeds for front Speakers B, providing
improved bass and treble performance.
Connect the AV receiver’s ZONE 2 R positive (+)
1
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) tweeter
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 R negative (–) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK R posi-
2
• For bi-amping, the ZONE 2 L/R terminal posts con-
nect to the front speakers’ tweeter terminals. And the
SURR BACK L/R terminal posts connect to the front
speakers’ woofer terminals.
tive (+) terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+)
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV
receiver’s SURR BACK R negative (–) terminal
to the right speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low)
terminal.
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the “Speaker Type: Front(Speaker B)” setting to
“Bi-Amp” to enable bi-amping (see page 61).
Connect the AV receiver’s ZONE 2 L positive (+)
3
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) tweeter
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 L negative (–) terminal to the left
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.
• When front Speakers B are biamped, front Speakers A
must be wired normally.
Important:
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure
to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’
tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals.
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L posi-
4
tive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+)
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV
receiver’s SURR BACK L negative (–) terminal to
the left speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) ter-
minal.
• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support
bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.
Tweeter (high)
Tweeter (high)
Woofer (low)
Woofer (low)
Left speaker
Right speaker
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bridged Speaker Hookup
Bridging Front Speakers B
The ZONE 2 L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front speakers and surround back
speakers respectively, or bridged together to provide
almost double the output power for the front speakers.
Connect the AV receiver’s ZONE 2 R positive (+)
1
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) ter-
minal. And connect the AV receiver’s SURR
BACK R positive (+) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative terminal.
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive
2 speakers in the main room (2.1 speakers if you’re
using a powered subwoofer).
Connect the AV receiver’s ZONE 2 L positive (+)
2
• For bridging, the positive (+) ZONE 2 L/R and SURR
BACK L/R terminal posts are used, but the negative
(–) ZONE 2 L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminals are
not.
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) terminal.
And connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L
positive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s negative
terminal.
• Once you’ve completed the bridging connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the “Speaker Type: Front(Speaker B)” setting to
• When front Speakers B are bridged, front Speakers A
must be wired normally.
Notes:
• Use only front speakers with an impedance of 8
ohms or higher for bridging. Failure to do so may
seriously damage the AV receiver.
• When using bridging, make sure that your front speak-
ers can handle the additional power.
Right speaker
Left speaker
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting Antenna
Use thumbtacks or something similar to
fix the FM antenna into position.
2
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor
FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to connect
commercially available outdoor FM and AM antennas.
The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without
any antenna connected, so you must connect the antenna
to use the tuner.
Thumbtacks, etc.
■ North American Model
AM ANTENNA push terminals
Caution: Be careful that you don’t injure yourself
when using thumbtacks.
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-
door FM antenna instead (see page 32).
FM ANTENNA jack
■ Other Models
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna
AM ANTENNA push terminals
The supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use
only.
Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting
the tabs into the base, as shown.
1
FM ANTENNA jack
Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna
Connect both wires of the AM loop
antenna to the AM push terminals, as
shown.
2
The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.
Attach the FM antenna, as shown.
(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so
they can be connected either way around).
1
■ North American Model
Make sure that the wires are attached securely and
that the push terminals are gripping the bare
wires, not the insulation.
FM75
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.
■ North American Model
■ Other Models
FM75
Push
Insert wire
Release
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.
Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an FM radio station and adjust
the position of the FM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
cumstances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna splitter, as
shown.
■ Other Models
3
Push
Insert wire
Release
TV/FM antenna splitter
To AV receiver
To TV (or VCR)
Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna
If good reception cannot be achieved using the supplied
AM loop antenna, an outdoor AM antenna can be used
in addition to the loop antenna, as shown.
Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an AM radio station and adjust
the position of the AM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
■ North American Model
Keep the antenna as far away as possible from
your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power
cords.
Outdoor antenna
Insulated antenna cable
AM loop antenna
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commer-
cially available outdoor AM antenna (see page 32).
■ Other Models
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna
Outdoor antenna
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-
door FM antenna instead.
Insulated antenna cable
AM loop antenna
FM 75
Outdoor AM antennas work best when installed horizon-
tally outside, but good results can sometimes be obtained
indoors by mounting horizontally above a window. Note
that the AM loop antenna should be left connected.
Notes:
• Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but usable
results can sometimes be obtained when installed in an
attic or loft.
Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance with
local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.
• For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well
away from tall buildings, preferably with a clear line
of sight to your local FM transmitter.
• Outdoor antenna should be located away from possi-
ble noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, etc.
• For safety reasons, outdoor antenna should be situated
well away from power lines and other high-voltage
equipment.
• Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance
with local regulations to prevent electrical shock haz-
ards.
■ Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter
It’s best not to use the same antenna for both FM and TV
reception, as this can cause interference problems. If cir-
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AV Connection Color Coding
About AV Connections
RCA-type AV connections are usually color coded: red,
white, and yellow. Use red plugs to connect right-
channel audio inputs and outputs (typically labeled “R”).
Use white plugs to connect left-channel audio inputs and
outputs (typically labeled “L”). And use yellow plugs to
connect composite video inputs and outputs.
• Before making any AV connections, read the manuals
supplied with your other AV components.
• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed
and double-checked all AV connections.
Optical Digital Jacks
Analog audio
Left (white)
Right (red)
Left (white)
Right (red)
The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-type
covers that open when an optical plug is inserted and
close when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.
Composite video
(Yellow)
(Yellow)
Right!
Caution: To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical
plug straight when inserting and removing.
• Push plugs in all the way to make
good connections (loose connec-
tions can cause noise or malfunc-
tions).
• To prevent interference, keep
audio and video cables away from
power cords and speaker cables.
Wrong!
AV Cables and Jacks
Video
Cable
Jack
Description
HDMI connections can carry uncompressed stan-
dard- or high-definition digital video and audio and
offer the best picture and sound quality.
HDMI
HDMI
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and
color difference signals (PR, PB), providing the best
picture quality. (Some TV manufacturers label their
component video jacks slightly differently.)
Y
C
C
Y
Y
Component
video cable
C
B/PB
B
/
P
P
B
R
C
B/PB
C
R/PR
R/
C
R/PR
S-Video separates the luminance and color signals
and provides better picture quality than composite
video.
S
S-Video cable
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, VCRs,
and other video equipment.
Composite
video cable
V
Audio
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is
the same as for coaxial.
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
Optical digital
audio cable
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is
the same as for optical.
Coaxial digital
audio cable
This cable carries analog audio. It’s the most
common connection format for analog audio and
can be found on virtually all AV components.
L
Analog audio
cable (RCA)
R
This cable carries multichannel analog audio and is
typically used to connect DVD players with a 7.1-
channel analog audio output. Several standard
analog audio cables can be used instead of a multi-
channel cable.
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK
Multichannel
analog audio
cable (RCA)
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
Note: The AV receiver does not support SCART connections.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting Both Audio & Video
By connecting both the audio and video outputs of your DVD player and other AV components to the AV receiver, you
can switch the audio and video signals simultaneously simply by changing the input source on the AV receiver.
: Signal Flow
Video
Video
Audio
Audio
TV, projector,
etc.
DVD player, etc.
Which Connections Should I Use?
The AV receiver supports several connection formats for compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The format
you choose will depend on the formats supported by your other components. Use the following sections as a guide.
For video components, you must make an audio connection and a video connection.
Video Connection Formats
Video equipment can be connected to the AV receiver by using any one of the following video connection formats:
composite video, S-Video, component video, or HDMI, the latter offering the best picture quality.
The AV receiver can upconvert and downconvert between video formats, depending on the “Monitor Out” setting, which
generally determines whether video signals are upconverted for the component video output or the HDMI outputs.
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video signals pass through the system without upconver-
sion (e.g., component video input through to component video output). It’s also recommended that you set the
“Immediate Display” preference to “Off” (see page 116), the “Picture Adjust” setting to the default (see
■ “Monitor Out” Setting Set to “HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”
With the “Monitor Out” setting set to “HDMI
input signals flow through the AV receiver as
Video Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.
shown, with composite video, S-Video, and
component video sources all being upcon-
verted for the respective HDMI output. Use the
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
“HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub” setting if
you connect the AV receiver’s HDMI OUT
MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB, respectively, to
your TV.
IN
AV receiver
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective
input signals as they are.
MONITOR OUT
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
TV, projector, etc.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ “Monitor Out” Setting Set to
“Analog”
Video Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.
With the “Monitor Out” setting set to “Analog”
(see page 52), video input signals flow through
the AV receiver as shown, with composite
video and S-Video sources being upconverted
for the component video output. Use this set-
ting if you connect the AV receiver’s COM-
PONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT to your
TV.
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
HDMI
IN
AV receiver
Composite video is upconverted to S-Video
and S-Video is downconverted to composite
video. Note that these conversions only apply
to the MONITOR OUT V and S outputs, not
the VCR/DVR OUT V and S outputs.
MONITOR OUT
S-Video
Composite
Component
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective
input signals as they are.
TV, projector, etc.
This signal flow also applies when the Monitor
Video Signal Flow and the Resolution Setting
Video Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.
When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Ana-
lution” setting is set to anything other than
“Through” (see page 55), the video signal flow
will be as shown here, with composite video
and S-Video sources being upconverted for the
component video output.
Composite
S-Video
S-Video
Component
HDMI
HDMI
IN
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective
analog input signals as they are. HDMI input
signals are not output.
AV receiver
MONITOR OUT
S-Video
Composite
Component
TV, projector, etc.
Audio Connection Formats
Audio equipment can be connected to the AV
receiver by using any of the following audio
connection formats: analog, optical, coaxial,
analog multichannel, or HDMI.
Audio Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.
When choosing a connection format, bear in
mind that the AV receiver does not convert dig-
ital input signals for analog line outputs and
vice versa. For example, audio signals con-
nected to an optical or coaxial digital input are
not output by the analog TAPE OUT.
Analog Multichannel Optical Coaxial
HDMI
HDMI
AV receiver
2
*
Analog
Optical
1
*
*2 Only the front L/R channels are output.
MD recorder, etc.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a TV or Projector
See “Connecting Components with HDMI” on page 42 for HDMI connection information.
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your TV (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your TV (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your TV or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
c
and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
TV
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OUT S
Component video input
S-Video input
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
MONITOR OUT V
Composite video input
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
GAME/TV IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME/TV)
b
c
C
b
c
B
a
A
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
Connect one or the other
TV, projector,
etc.
Connection
b
If your TV has no audio outputs, connect an audio output from your VCR or cable or satellite
receiver to the AV receiver and use its tuner to listen to TV programs through the AV receiver (see
Hint!
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a DVD player
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your DVD player (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from a DVD or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
c
and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
• If your DVD player has main left and right outputs and multichannel left and right outputs, be sure to use the
main left and right outputs for connection
.
a
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
DVD player
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1 (DVD)
DVD IN S
Component video output
S-Video output
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
DVD IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
DVD IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1 (DVD)
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME/TV)
b
c
C
b
c
B
a
A
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Connect one or the other
c
DVD player
To connect a DVD player or DVD-Audio/SACD-capable player with a
multichannel analog audio output, see page 38.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hooking Up the Multichannel Input
If your DVD player supports multichannel audio formats such as DVD-Audio and SACD, and it has a multichannel
analog audio output, you can connect it to the AV receiver’s multichannel input.
Use a multichannel analog audio cable, or several normal audio cables, to connect the AV receiver’s MULTI CH:
FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR BACK L/R, and SUBWOOFER jacks to the 7.1-channel analog audio
output on your DVD player. If your DVD player has a 5.1-channel analog audio output, don’t connect anything to the
AV receiver’s SURR BACK L/R jacks.
Before using the multichannel input, you must assign it to an input selector. See “Analog Audio Input Setup” on page 60.
To select the multichannel input, see “Selecting Audio Inputs” on page 120. To adjust the subwoofer sensitivity for the
7.1 ch
5.1 ch
FRONT
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
L
L
R
R
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
L
R
L
R
L
R
FRONT
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
SURR
BACK
DVD player
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a VCR or DVD Recorder for Playback
With this hookup, you can use the tuner in your VCR or DVR to listen to your favorite TV programs
via the AV receiver, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.
Hint!
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVD recorder (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVD recorder (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to the VCR or DVD recorder in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use and
b
c
a
, or and .)
b
a
c
Connection
AV receiver
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2
VCR/DVR IN S
Signal flow
VCR or DVD recorder
Component video output
S-Video output
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
VCR/DVR IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
VCR/DVR IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME/TV)
b
c
C
b
B
a
c
A
Connection
must be
A
assigned
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Connect one or the other
Connection
c
VCR,
DVD recorder
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a VCR or DVD Recorder for Recording
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVD recorder ( or ), and then make the connection. The
A
B
video source to be recorded must be connected to the AV receiver via the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVD recorder ( or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
Connection
AV receiver
VCR/DVR OUT S
Signal flow
VCR or DVD recorder
S-Video input
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
A
B
a
VCR/DVR OUT V
Composite video input
Audio L/R input
VCR/DVR OUT L/R
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT
Digital optical input
b
B
A
a
b
L
R
OPTICAL
IN
AUDIO
IN
S VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
IN
VCR,
DVD recorder
Notes:
• The AV receiver must be turned on for recording. Recording is not possible while it’s on Standby mode.
• If you want to record directly from your TV or another video source without going through the AV receiver, connect
the audio and video outputs from your TV or other video component directly to the recording VCR/DVD recorder’s
audio and video inputs. See the manuals supplied with your TV or VCR/DVD recorder for details.
• Video signals connected to composite video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR OUT V jack. So if your
source TV or VCR is connected to a composite video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be connected to the
VCR/DVR OUT V jack. Likewise, video signals connected to S-Video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR
OUT S jack. So if your source TV or VCR is connected to an S-Video input, the recording VCR/DVD recorder must
be connected to the VCR/DVR OUT S jack.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, Terrestrial Set-top box, or Other Video Source
With this hookup, you can use your satellite or cable receiver to listen to your favorite TV programs
via the AV receiver, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.
Hint!
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches the video source (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches the video source (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from the video source or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
c
and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
Video source
Component video output
S-Video output
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3
CBL/SAT IN S
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
CBL/SAT IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
CBL/SAT IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 3 (CBL/SAT)
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2 (CD)
b
c
C
B
b
a
c
A
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Connect one or the other
c
Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting Components with HDMI
About HDMI
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new digital
interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors, DVD players, set-top boxes, and other video components. Until now,
several separate video and audio cables have been required to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single cable can
carry control signals, digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM, multichannel digital
audio, or multichannel PCM).
*1
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface) , so TVs and displays
with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and
displays, resulting in no picture.)
*2
The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) , so only HDCP-compatible components
will display a picture.
The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the following standard:
Repeater System, Deep Color, Lip Sync, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD,
Dolby Digital Plus, SA-CD, and Multichannel PCM
Supported Audio Formats
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Multichannel linear PCM (7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS-HD Mas-
ter Audio)
Your DVD player must be able to output these formats from its HDMI OUT.
About Copyright Protection
*2
The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) , a copy-protection system for digital
video signals. Other devices connected to the AV receiver via HDMI must also support HDCP.
Use a commercially available HDMI cable (supplied with some components) to connect the AV receiver’s HDMI OUT
MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB to the HDMI input on your TV or projector.
*3
*1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by the DDWG in 1999.
*2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The video encryption technology developed by Intel for HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to
protect video content and requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.
*3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel, Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon Image, this open
industry group’s objective is to address the industry's requirements for a digital connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and
digital displays.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making HDMI Connections
Step 1:
Use HDMI cables to connect the AV receiver’s HDMI jacks to your HDMI-compatible Blu-ray player/DVD player,
TV, projector, and so on.
Step 2:
Assign each HDMI IN to an input selector. See “Video Input Setup” on page 56.
■ Video Signals
Digital video signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are normally output by the HDMI MAIN OUT and SUB OUT for
display on your TV. Composite video, S-Video, and component video sources can be upconverted for the HDMI outputs.
See “Video Connection Formats” on page 34 for more information.
■ Audio Signals
Digital audio signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are output by the speakers and headphones connected to the AV
receiver. Normally, they are not output by the HDMI outputs, unless the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (see
page 118).
To listen to audio received by the HDMI IN jacks through your TV’s speakers, set the “Audio TV Out”
Hint!
setting to “On” (see page 118), and set your DVD player’s “Audio TV Out” put setting to PCM.
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
IN
TV
Blu-ray player/
DVD player
HDMI
HDMI
Notes:
• The HDMI video stream is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface), so TVs and displays with a DVI input can
be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (Note that DVI connections only carry video, so you’ll need
to make a separate connection for audio.) However, reliable operation with such an adapter is not guaranteed. In
addition, video signals from a PC are not supported.
• When listening to an HDMI component through the AV receiver, set the HDMI component so that its video can be
seen on the TV screen (on the TV, select the input of the HDMI component connected to the AV receiver). If the TV
power is off or the TV is set to another input source, this may result in no sound from the AV receiver or the sound
may be cut off.
• When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (see page 118), or “TV Control” is set to “Enable” (see page 119)
and you’re listening through your TV’s speakers, if you turn up the AV receiver volume control, the sound will be
output by the AV receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change
your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV receiver’s volume.
• The HDMI audio signal (sampling rate, bit length, etc.) may be restricted by the connected source component. If the
picture is poor or there’s no sound from a component connected via HDMI, check its setup. Refer to the connected
component’s instruction manual for details.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a Game Console
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your game console (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your game console or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
a
and .)
b
Connection
AV receiver
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3
GAME/TV IN S
Signal flow
Game console
Component video output
S-Video output
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
GAME/TV IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
GAME/TV IN L/R
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME/TV)
b
C
B
b
a
A
Connection
must be
A
L
R
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Game Console
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a Camcorder or Other Device
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your camcorder ( or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your camcorder ( or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
AUX 2 INPUT
DIGITAL
b
a
AUX 2 INPUT
AUX 2 INPUT
L
AUDIO
R
AUX 2 INPUT
VIDEO
S VIDEO
A
B
VIDEO
OUT
L
AUDIO
OUT
R
S VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Camcorder, etc.
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
Camcorder
AUX 2 INPUT S VIDEO
AUX 2 INPUT VIDEO
S-Video output
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
a
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital optical output
AUX 2 INPUT L-AUDIO-R
AUX 2 INPUT DIGITAL
b
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a CD Player or Turntable
■ CD Player or Turntable (MM) with Built-in Phono Preamp
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your CD player (
,
, or ). Use connection for a turntable with a built-in
a
b
c
a
phono preamp.
IN 2
b
IN
(VCR/DVR)
COAXIAL
L
L
R
R
IN
a
AUDIO
OUTPUT
L
CD
R
OPTICAL
Connect one
or the other
Connection
a
IN 2
(CD)
CD
must be
assigned
b
c
COAXIAL
OUT
L
R
Turntable (MM) with
built-in phono preamp
AUDIO
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
CD player
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from the CD player or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To connect the CD player digitally, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well,
b
c
use and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
CD or turntable
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
CD IN L/R
⇐
⇐
⇐
a
b
c
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2 (CD)
■ Turntable (MM) with no Phono Preamp Built-in
The AV receiver’s PHONO IN is designed for use with a
moving magnet (MM) type cartridge.
Use an analog audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
PHONO IN L/R jacks to the audio output on your turn-
table.
Notes:
• If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the
AV receiver’s GND screw. With some turntables, con-
necting the ground wire may produce an audible hum.
If this happens, disconnect it.
IN
L
R
• If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type car-
tridge, you’ll need a commercially available MC head
amp or MC transformer. Connect your turntable to the
head amp or transformer, and connect that to the AV
receiver’s PHONO IN L/R jacks.
PHONO
AUDIO
OUTPUT
L
• You can also use a phono equalizer to connect a turn-
table with an MC-type cartridge. See your phono
equalizer’s manual for details.
R
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT Recorder
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your recorder (
,
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
d
IN
a
COAXIAL
b
L
IN 2
R
(VCR/DVR)
TAPE
c
OPTICAL
a
IN 2
(CD)
L
R
OPTICAL
d
TAPE
L
R
L
R
Connect one
or the other
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
OPTICAL
IN
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
OUT
Cassette, CDR, MD, etc.
• With connection , you can play and record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To connect the recorder digitally for playback, use connections and , or and
.
a
b
a
c
• To connect the recorder digitally for recording, use connection
.
d
Connection
a
AV receiver
Signal flow
Cassette, CDR, MD, or DAT recorder
⇐
⇒
TAPE IN L/R
TAPE OUT L/R
Analog audio L/R output
Analog audio L/R input
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2 (CD)
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Digital optical input
⇐
⇐
⇒
b
c
d
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a Power Amplifier
If you want to use a more powerful power amplifier and use the AV receiver solely as a preamp, connect the amp to the
PRE OUT jacks, and connect all speakers and the subwoofer to the power amplifier. If you have a powered subwoofer,
connect it to the AV receiver’s PRE OUT: SUBWOOFER jack.
FRONT
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
FRONT
CENTER
SR
SURR BACK
1. Front left speaker
2. Center speaker
3. Front right speaker
SUBWOOFER
4. Surround left speaker
5. Surround right speaker
6. Surround back left speaker
7. Surround back right speaker
Powered subwoofer
Power amplifier
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting an RI Dock
■ If Your iPod Doesn’t Support Video:
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV receiver’s AUX 1 IN L/R jacks.
Not all iPod models output video. For information
about which iPod models are supported by the RI
Dock, see the RI Dock’s instruction manual.
(Onkyo DS-A2X hookup shown below.)
■ If Your iPod Supports Video:
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV receiver’s AUX 1 IN L/R jacks, and connect its
video output jack to the AV receiver’s AUX 1 IN V
jack.
IN
L
R
(Onkyo DS-A2X hookup shown below.)
V
IN
L
R
■ If you have an Onkyo DS-A1 RI Dock
• Connect its video output jack to the AV receiver’s AUX 1 jack.
Notes:
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or “HDD/DOCK”.
• By using the [CD] (TX-NR906) or [DOCK] (TX-SR876) REMOTE MODE button on the remote controller of
the AV receiver to change the remote mode to “DOCK”, you can operate your iPod in the RI Dock (see page 20).
If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the appropriate remote control code (see page 137).
• See the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more information.
Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components (North American model only)
The AV receiver has AC outlet on its rear panel that can be used to
connect the power cords of other components that you intend to use
with the AV receiver. These components can then be left turned on so
that they turn on and off as and when the AV receiver is set to On or
Standby.
Caution:
• Make sure that the total capacity of the components that you con-
nect to the AC OUTLET does not exceed the stated capacity.
Notes:
the AC outlet are on all the time regardless of whether the AV
receiver is set to On or Standby, or Ready mode in this case, so any
components connected to them cannot be turned on or off automat-
ically.
AC OUTLET
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.
• Onkyo components connected via u should be connected
directly to a wall outlet, not an AC OUTLET on the AV receiver.
North American model
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting Onkyo u Components
Step 1: Make sure that each Onkyo component is connected to the AV receiver with an analog audio cable (RCA).
Step 2: Make the necessary u connections (see illustration below).
With u (Remote Interactive), you can use the following special functions:
Auto Power On/Standby
When you start playback on a component connected via u, if the AV receiver is on Standby, it will automatically turn
on and select that component as the input source. Similarly, when the AV receiver is set to Standby, all components
connected via u will also go on Standby. This function will not work with components that are connected to an AC
OUTLET on the AV receiver.
Direct Change
When playback is started on a component connected via u, the AV receiver automatically selects that component as
the input source. If your DVD player is connected to the AV receiver’s multichannel input, you’ll need to press the
[AUDIO SEL] button repeatedly and select Multich to hear all channels (see page 80), as the Direct Change u func-
tion selects the DVD IN L/R jacks.
Remote Control
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to control your other u-capable Onkyo components. You must enter
the appropriate remote control code first (see page 138). And remember to point the remote controller at the AV receiver
and not the other component.
Notes:
IN
• Use only u cables for u connections. u cables
L
are supplied with Onkyo players (DVD, CD, etc.).
R
• Some components have two u jacks. You can con-
CD
nect either one to the AV receiver. The other jack is
FRONT
for connecting additional u-capable components.
L
• Connect only Onkyo components to u jacks. Con-
REMOTE
CONTROL
R
necting other manufacturer’s components may cause
a malfunction.
DVD
• Some components may not support all u functions.
Refer to the manuals supplied with your other Onkyo
components.
e.g., CD player
e.g., DVD player
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power
On/Standby and Direct Change u functions do not
work.
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
Connecting the Power Cord
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all your speakers and AV components.
• Connect the power cord to the AV receiver’s AC INLET.
• Plug the other end of the power cord into a suitable wall outlet.
• Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment
on the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver into a different branch circuit.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On the AV Receiver
• North American model
• Other models
STANDBY
ON
ON/STANDBY
ON/STANDBY
STANDBY indicator
ON
STANDBY
TV
STANDBY indicator
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX2
6
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
CLEAR
12
0
-- --- 10
11
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
RECEIVER
CABLE
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
POWER
Turning On and Standby
Set the [POWER] switch to the ON position ( ).
(Skip this step if you have the North American model.)
1
The AV receiver enters Standby mode, and the STANDBY indicator comes on.
On the AV receiver, press the [ON/STANDBY] button.
2
Remote
controller
AV receiver
On the remote controller, press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button,
followed by the [ON] button.
The AV receiver comes on, the display lights up, and the STANDBY indicator goes off.
or
Pressing the remote controller’s [ON] button again will turn on any components con-
nected via u.
To turn the AV receiver off, press the [ON/STANDBY] button, or press the remote
controller’s [STANDBY] button. The AV receiver will enter Standby mode. To prevent
any loud surprises the next time you turn on the AV receiver, turn down the volume
before you turn it off.
For non-North American models: To completely shut down the AV receiver, set the [POWER] switch to the OFF
position ( ).
Up and Running in a Few Easy Steps
To get your system up and running with the minimum of fuss, here’s a few pointers to help you configure the AV
receiver before you use it for the very first time. These settings only need to be made once.
■ Do the automatic speaker setup—this is essential!
®
See “Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ XT)” on
■ Did you connect your TV to an HDMI OUT or COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT?
If you did, see “Monitor Out Setup” on page 55.
■ Did you connect a component to an HDMI input,
Y
HDMI
component video input, or digital audio input?
COAXIAL
PB
PR
OPTICAL
respectively.
■ Did you connect an Onkyo MD recorder, CD recorder, or RI
OUT
IN
Dock?
TAPE
MD recorder, CD recorder,
RI Dock
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup
This section explains the settings that you need to make before using the AV receiver for the very first time.
Press the [HDMI OUT] button.
The current setting is displayed.
Monitor Setup
1
On the “Monitor Out” settings, you can select whether or
not to have the video sources’ images output through the
HDMI OUT, as well as whether to have the onscreen
setup menu output through the HDMI OUT or through
an analog output.
Press the [HDMI OUT] button
repeatedly to select:
2
Analog:
Select this if your TV is connected
to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT, S MONITOR
OUT, or V MONITOR OUT.
HDMI Main:
1, 2
Select this if your TV is connected
to the HDMI OUT MAIN.
If you connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT, set the “Monitor Out” setting to “Ana-
log” so that the onscreen setup menus are displayed and
composite video and S-Video sources are upconverted*
and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT.
HDMI Sub:
Select this if your TV is connected
to the HDMI OUT SUB.
Note:
When “HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”
is selected, the onscreen setup menus
are output by only the HDMI outputs.
If you’re not using the HDMI outputs
and select “HDMI Main” or “HDMI
Sub” by mistake and the menus dis-
appear, press the [HDMI OUT] but-
ton to select “Analog”.
Composite video, S-Video
IN
Component video
OUT
Composite video, S-Video
Component video
Note:
See page 34 for charts showing how the “Monitor Out”
video signal flow through the AV receiver.
If you connect your TV to the HDMI OUT MAIN or
HDMI OUT SUB, set the “Monitor Out” setting to
“HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub” so that the onscreen
setup menus are displayed and composite video, S-
Video, and component video sources are upconverted*
and output by the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT
SUB. The onscreen setup menus are displayed on the
HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB only.
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
HDMI
IN
OUT
Composite video, S-Video,
HDMI
component video
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI
OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB and COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT and have the AV receiver
upconvert the picture resolution as necessary to match
the resolution supported by your TV (see page 111).
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In this Instruction Manual, illustrations from the onscreen menu or explanations referring to the menu will be in the
same language as the Instruction Manual. The default Language setting for the onscreen menu is English. If your
Instruction Manual is in a language other than English, first follow the instructions below to change the Language.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Language”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
Selecting the Language used for the
onscreen setup menus
4
This setting determines the language used for the
onscreen setup menus. You can select: English, German,
French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, or Japanese.
English, German, French, Spanish,
Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Japanese
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
1
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
5
Use the Up and Down [ q]/[w] but-
2
tons to select “6. Miscella-
neous”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Miscellaneous” menu appears.
6. Miscellaneous
1. Volume Setup
2. OSD Setup
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
ENTER
RETURN
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. OSD Setup”,
and then press [ENTER].
3
The “OSD Setup” menu appears.
6–2. OSD Setup
Immediate Display
Monitor Type
Display Position
TV Format
On
16 : 9
Bottom
Auto
English
Language
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
VALUE
RETURN
Note:
The “TV Format” (*) setting is not
available on the North American mod-
els.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INPUT SELECTOR
■ Menus for First Time Setup
ZONE
2
1
2
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
Submenus
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
DIMMER
2
1
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
MOVE
ENTER RETURN EXIT
ENTER RETURN SETUP
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
2. Speaker Setup
1. Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Config
3. Speaker Distance
4. Level Calibration
5. Equalizer Settings
6. THX Audio Setup
RANDOM
Using the Onscreen Setup Menus
MOVE
ENTER RETURN EXIT
ENTER RETURN SETUP
Carry out the settings for the AV receiver by using the
Onscreen Setup Menu.
Main menu
MENU
Press the [RECEIVER] button fol-
lowed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1. Input/Output Assign
2. Speaker Setup
3. Audio Adjust
1
4. Source Setup
5. Listening Mode Preset
6. Miscellaneous
7. Hardware Setup
8. Lock Setup
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
ENTER
RETURN
MENU
1. Input/Output Assign
2. Speaker Setup
3. Audio Adjust
4. Source Setup
5. Listening Mode Preset
6. Miscellaneous
7. Hardware Setup
8. Lock Setup
6. Miscellaneous
1. Volume Setup
2. OSD Setup
MOVE
ENTER
ENTER RETURN EXIT
RETURN SETUP
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
ENTER
RETURN
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select submenu and then
press [ENTER].
2
7. Hardware Setup
1. Remote Control
2. Zone2/Zone3
3. Tuner
4. Analog Multich
5. HDMI
6. Network
The submenu appears.
*
Press the [SETUP] button to close the
menu.
MOVE
ENTER RETURN EXIT
ENTER RETURN SETUP
Press the [RETURN] button to return to
the previous menu.
* TX-NR906 only
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitor Out Setup
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
2
3
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX2
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
6
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
CLEAR
0
-- --- 10
11
12
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “1. Monitor Out”,
and then press [ENTER].
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
DIMMER
The “Monitor Out” menu appears.
2, 3
1, 6
2–5
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
1–1. Monitor Out
-
Monitor Out
Analog
PREV
CH
Resolution
Brightness
Contrast
Hue
Through
0
0
0
DISPLAY
MUTING
Saturation
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
SP
A
SP
B
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
VALUE
RETURN
NING MODE
DIRECT
ALL ST
PURE
A
If you connect your TV to theTHCX OMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT, set the “Monitor Out” setting to
“Analog” so that the onscreen setup menus are displayed
and composite video and S-Video sources are upcon-
verted and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO MON-
ITOR OUT.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Monitor Out”, and
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select:
4
Analog:
Select this if your TV is connected
to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT, S MONITOR
OUT, or V MONITOR OUT.
If you connect your TV to the HDMI OUT MAIN or
HDMI OUT SUB, set the “Monitor Out” setting to
“HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”, respectively, so that the
onscreen setup menus are displayed and composite
video, S-Video, and component video sources are
upconverted and output by the HDMI OUT MAIN or
HDMI OUT SUB.
HDMI Main:
Select this if your TV is connected
to the HDMI OUT MAIN.
HDMI Sub:
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI out-
puts and COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT and
have the AV receiver upconvert the picture resolution as
necessary to match the resolution supported by your TV.
Select this if your TV is connected
to the HDMI OUT SUB.
Note:
When “HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”
is selected, the onscreen setup menus
are output by only the HDMI outputs.
If you’re not using the HDMI outputs
and select “HDMI Main” or “HDMI
Sub” by mistake and the menus dis-
appear, press the AV receiver’s
[HDMI OUT] button so that “Moni-
tor Out: Analog” appears on the dis-
play.
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Input Setup
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
5
tons to select “Resolution”, and
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select:
HDMI Input Setup
If you connect a video component to an HDMI IN, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,
if you connect your DVD player to HDMI IN 1, you
must assign HDMI IN 1 to the DVD input selector.
Through:
Select this to pass video through the
AV receiver at the same resolution
and with no conversion.
By default, none of the HDMI inputs are assigned.
Auto:
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with an
HDMI cable, you can set the AV receiver so that com-
posite video, S-Video, and component video sources are
upconverted and output by the HDMI outputs. You can
set this for each input selector by selecting the “- - -”
option.
Select this to have the AV receiver
automatically convert video at reso-
lutions not supported by your TV.
(Not available when the “Monitor
Out” setting is set to “Analog”.)
*
480p:
Select this for 480p output and
video conversion as necessary.
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
HDMI
HDMI
720p:
IN
Select this for 720p output and
video conversion as necessary.
1080i:
OUT
Select this for 1080i output and
video conversion as necessary.
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
1080p:
Select this for 1080p output and
video conversion as necessary. (Not
available when the “Monitor Out”
setting is set to “Analog”.)
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
Source:
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Output will be according to the res-
olution level which was set with
Resolution inside Source:
4-4. Picture Adjust. (Setting for
each Source becomes possible.)
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press
[ENTER].
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
2
6
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
Notes:
1. Input/Output Assign
Out” and “Resolution” settings affect the video signal
flow through the AV receiver.
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
3
tons to select “2. HDMI Input”,
and then press [ENTER].
The “HDMI Input” menu appears.
1–2. HDMI Input
DVD
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
AUX2
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
VALUE
RETURN
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an input selector,
and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
4
HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4:
Select the HDMI IN to which the
video component has been con-
nected.
- - -:
Output composite video, S-Video,
and component video sources from
the HDMI OUT. The video output
signal from the HDMI OUT is the
one configured in “Component
Video Setup” (see page 58).
Each HDMI IN cannot be assigned to
more than one input selector. When
HDMI1 - HDMI4 have already been
assigned, you must set first any unused
input selectors to “- - -” or you will be
unable to assign HDMI1 - HDMI4 to
input selector.
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
Notes:
• For composite video, S-Video, and component video
upconversion for the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI
OUT SUB, the “Monitor Out” setting must be set to
“HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”, respectively (see
page 55), and the “HDMI Input” setting must be set to
nal flow and upconversion.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as
explained here, the digital audio input for that input
selector is automatically set to the same HDMI IN.
• The “TUNER” input selector cannot be assigned and
is fixed at the “- - -” option.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Component Video Setup
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
2
3
If you connect a video component to a COMPONENT
VIDEO IN, you must assign that input to an input
selector. For example, if you connect your DVD player
to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3, you must assign COM-
PONENT VIDEO IN 3 to the DVD input selector.
By default, the DVD input selector is assigned to COM-
PONENT VIDEO IN 1, and all of the other input selec-
tors are assigned to the “- - -” option.
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
Input selector
DVD
Default assignment
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “3. Component
Video Input”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Component Video Input” menu
appears.
IN1
- - -
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
- - -
- - -
- - -
AUX2
- - -
1–3. Component Video Input
DVD
IN1
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
TAPE
- - -
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
TUNER
CD
- - - (Fixed)
- - -
AUX2
PHONO
- - -
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with a
component video cable, you can set the AV receiver so
that composite video and S-Video sources are upcon-
verted* and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO MON-
ITOR OUT. You can set this for each input selector by
selecting the “- - -” option.
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
VALUE
RETURN
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an input selector,
and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
4
IN1: Use the video component
connected to COMPONENT
VIDEO IN 1.
Composite video, S-Video
IN
Component video
IN2: Use the video component
connected to COMPONENT
VIDEO IN 2.
IN3: Use the video component
connected to COMPONENT
VIDEO IN 3.
OUT
Composite video, S-Video
Component video
- - -: Output composite video and
S-Video sources from the
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT.
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Notes:
• For composite video and S-Video upconversion for
the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT, the
“Monitor Out” setting must be set to “Analog” (see
page 55), and the “Component Video Input” setting
tion on video signal flow and upconversion.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Digital Audio Input Setup
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an input selector,
and then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
4
If you connect a component to a digital audio input, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,
if you connect your CD player to OPTICAL IN 2, you
must assign OPTICAL IN 2 to the “CD” input selector.
“COAX1”, “COAX2”, “COAX3”,
“OPT1”, “OPT2”, or “- - - (ana-
log)”.
Here are the default assignments.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an
Input selector
DVD
Default assignment
COAX1
Setup” on page 56, this input assign-
ment is automatically set to the same
HDMI IN. And in addition to the
usual inputs (e.g., COAX1, COAX2,
etc.), you can also select HDMI
inputs. If you change the input
assignment from an HDMI IN to one
of the other inputs (e.g., COAX1 or
COAX2), be sure to set the “Using
the DIGITAL INPUT Button” on
page 64 to the same input (e.g.,
COAX1 or COAX2).
• “AUX2” is used only for digital input
from the front panel terminals. When
HDMI IN is assigned to “AUX2” in
the same HDMI IN can be selected.
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
COAX2
COAX3
OPT1
- - -
AUX2
FRONT (Fixed)
- - -
TAPE
TUNER
CD
- - - (Fixed)
OPT2
PHONO
- - -
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
2
Examples:
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
If you connect your DVD player to the
OPTICAL IN 1 jack, set “DVD” to
“OPT1”.
If you want to listen to audio from the
component connected to the OPTICAL
IN 2 jack when the VCR/DVR input
selector is selected, set “VCR/DVR” to
“OPT2”.
If you want to listen to audio from the
component connected to the COAX-
IAL IN 1 jack when the CBL/SAT
input selector is selected, set
“CBL/SAT” to “COAX1”.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
For input selectors that you don’t want
to assign a digital input jack, set to
“- - - (analog)”.
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “4. Digital Audio
Input”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Digital Audio Input” menu
appears.
3
Notes:
• Only FRONT can be assigned to the AUX 2 input
selector.
1–4. Digital Audio Input
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
DVD
COAX1
COAX2
COAX3
OPT1
- - -
FRONT
- - -
- - -
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
AUX2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
OPT2
- - -
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
VALUE
RETURN
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Analog Audio Input Setup
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “5. Analog Audio
Input”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Analog Audio Input” menu
appears.
3
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
1–5. Analog Audio Input
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
Multich
DVD
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
CLEAR
12
0
-- --- 10
11
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
VALUE
RETURN
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
DIMMER
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select an input selec-
tor.
You can assign the multichannel input
to the following input selectors:
“DVD”, “VCR/DVR”, “CBL/SAT”,
“GAME/TV”, “AUX1”, “AUX2”,
“TAPE”, “CD”, or “PHONO”.
4
2, 3
1, 5
2–4
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
SP
A
SP
B
NING MODE
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
If you connect a component to the AV receiver’s analog
multichannel input, you must assign that input to an
input selector. For example, if you connect your DVD
player to the MULTI CH input, you must assign it to the
DVD input selector.
Notes:
• To listen to the component connected to the multi-
channel input, press the [AUDIO SEL] button repeat-
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
2
tons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker Settings
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “1. Speaker Set-
tings”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Speaker Settings” menu appears.
3
-
4
5
6
If you change these settings,you must run the auto-
matic speaker setup again (see page 64).
ZONE
2
1
2
2–1. Speaker Settings
Speaker impedance
Speaker Type
Front(Speaker A)
Front(Speaker B)
REMOTE MODE
6ohms
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
Normal
Not Use
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
DIMMER
2, 3
1, 7
2–6
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
VALUE
RETURN
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Speaker imped-
ance”, and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
4ohms: Select if the impedance of any
speaker is 4 ohms or more but
less than 6.
6ohms: Select if the impedances of all
speakers are between 6 and
16 ohms.
4
5
RANDOM
If the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or more but
less than 6, set the Speaker Impedance to 4 ohms.
To use bi-amping or bridging, you must change the
“Speaker Type” setting. For hookup information, see
Notes:
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive
up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
• Before you change these settings, turn down the vol-
ume.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Front(Speaker
A)”, and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
Normal:
The onscreen menus shown in this manual may be
slightly different from what you see on your TV.
Select this if you’ve connected your
front Speakers A normally.
Bi-Amp:
Select this if you’ve connected your
front Speakers A for bi-amped
operation.
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
BTL:
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Select this if you’ve connected your
front Speakers A for bridged opera-
tion. The BTL indicator will appear
on the display.
Note:
“Bi-Amp” and “BTL” cannot be
selected if “Front(Speaker B)” is set to
“Bi-Amp” or “BTL”.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
2
tons to select “2. Speaker
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.
2. Speaker Setup
1. Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Config
3. Speaker Distance
4. Level Calibration
5. Equalizer Settings
6. THX Audio Setup
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “6. Miscella-
neous”, and then press [ENTER].
6
2
3
tons to select “Front(Speaker
B)”, and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
The “Miscellaneous” menu appears.
Not Use:
6. Miscellaneous
1. Volume Setup
2. OSD Setup
Select this if you’re not using
Speakers B.
Normal:
Select this if you’ve connected your
front Speakers B normally.
Bi-Amp:
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
ENTER
RETURN
Select this if you’ve connected your
front Speakers B for bi-amped
operation.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. OSD Setup”,
and then press [ENTER].
BTL:
Select this if you’ve connected your
front Speakers B for bridged opera-
tion. The BTL indicator will appear
on the display.
The “OSD Setup” menu appears.
6–2. OSD Setup
Immediate Display
Monitor Type
Display Position
TV Format
On
16 : 9
Bottom
Auto
English
Note:
“Bi-Amp” and “BTL” cannot be
selected if “Front(Speaker A)” is set to
“Bi-Amp” or “BTL”.
Language
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
VALUE
RETURN
Press the [SETUP] button.
7
Setup closes.
Note:
The “TV Format” (*) setting is not
available on the North American mod-
els.
Note:
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “TV Format”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
Auto: Select this to have the AV
receiver automatically detect
the TV system from the video
input signals.
4
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
TV Format Setup
(not North American models)
For the onscreen setup menus to display properly, you
must specify the TV system used in your area.
NTSC: Select if the TV system in
your area is NTSC.
PAL: Select if the TV system in
your area is PAL.
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
1
The main menu appears onscreen.
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AM Frequency Step Setup
(on some models)
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
For AM tuning to work properly, you must specify the
AM frequency step used in your area. Note that when
this setting is changed, all radio presets are deleted.
Note:
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
1
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Changing the Input Display
If you connect an u-capable Onkyo MiniDisc
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE IN/OUT
jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the AUX 1 jacks, for u
to work properly, you must change this setting.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
2
This setting can only be changed on the AV receiver.
tons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
1, 2 1, 2
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
7. Hardware Setup
1. Remote Control
2. Zone2/Zone3
3. Tuner
4. Analog Multich
5. HDMI
6. Network
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
ENTER
RETURN
Press the [TAPE] or [AUX 1] input
selector button so that “TAPE” or
“AUX1” appears on the display.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “3. Tuner”, and
then press [ENTER].
1
3
4
The “Tuner” menu appears.
or
7–3. Tuner
AM Freq Step
9kHz
Press and hold down the [TAPE]
2
or [AUX 1] input selector button
(about 3 seconds) to change the
setting.
Repeat this step to select MD, CDR, or
DOCK.
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
VALUE
RETURN
(3 seconds)
or
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “AM Freq Step”,
and then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
10kHz: Select if 10 kHz steps are
used in your area.
For the TAPE input selector, the setting
changes in this order:
(3 seconds)
TAPE → MD → CDR
→
DOCK
9kHz: Select if 9 kHz steps are used
in your area.
For the AUX 1 input selector, the set-
ting changes in this order: AUX1 ↔
DOCK
Note:
DOCK can be selected for the TAPE input selector or
AUX 1 input selector, but not both at the same time.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the DIGITAL INPUT Button
Automatic Speaker Setup
(Audyssey MultEQ® XT)
Digital inputs can also be assigned to input selectors by
using the [DIGITAL INPUT] button on the AV receiver.
With the supplied calibrated microphone, Audyssey
MultEQ XT automatically determines the number of
speakers connected, their size for purposes of bass
management, optimum crossover frequencies to the
subwoofer (if present), and distances from the primary
listening position.
1
Audyssey MultEQ XT then removes the distortion
caused by room acoustics by capturing room acoustical
problems over the listening area in both the frequency
and time domain. The result is clear, well-balanced
sound for everyone. Enabling Audyssey MultEQ XT
allows you to also use Audyssey Dynamic EQ™, which
maintains the proper octave-to-octave balance at any
volume level.
2, 3
Press the input selector button
for the input selector that you
want to assign.
Before using this function, connect and position all of
your speakers.
1
If Audyssey Dynanic EQ is set to “Enable”,
™
Audyssey Dynamic Volume becomes available.
About Audyssey Dynamic Volume
Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of
large variations in volume level between television
programs, commercials, and between the soft and
loud passages of movies. Dynamic Volume looks at
the preferred volume setting by the user and then
monitors how the volume of program material is
being perceived by listeners in real time to decide
whether an adjustment is needed. Whenever
necessary, Dynamic Volume makes the necessary
rapid or gradual adjustments to maintain the desired
playback volume level while optimizing the dynamic
range. Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into
Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is
adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response,
tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog
clarity remain the same whether watching movies,
flipping between television channels, or changing
from stereo to surround sound content.
Press the [DIGITAL INPUT] but-
ton.
The current assignment is displayed.
2
Press the [DIGITAL INPUT] but-
ton repeatedly to select an
option.
Available options are the same as for
the Digital Input menu. See step 4 on
3
About Dynamic EQ
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of
deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by
taking into account human perception and room
acoustics. Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency
response and surround levels moment-by-moment at
any user-selected volume setting. The result is bass
response, tonal balance, and surround impression
that remain constant despite changes in volume.
Dynamic EQ combines information from incoming
source levels with actual output sound levels in the
room, a prerequisite for delivering a loudness
correction solution. Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in
tandem with Audyssey MultEQ to provide well-
balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
®
Measurement Positions
Using Audyssey MultEQ XT
To create a listening environment in your home theater
®
that all listeners will enjoy, Audysssey MultEQ takes
1
measurements at up to eight positions within the lis-
tening area.
■ 1st measurement position
This is the center position of your listening area, or
the listening position if there’s only one listener.
■ 2nd–8th measurement positions
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the
places where the other listeners will sit). You can
measure up to eight positions.
2, 11
The following examples show some typical home theater
seating arrangements. Choose the one that best matches
yours, and position the microphone accordingly when
prompted.
SETUP MIC
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
ZONE
2
1
REMOTE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
3–10
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
TV
TV
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
TV
TV
Notes:
• If any of your speakers is 4 ohms, change the
“Speaker impedance” setting before running the
• If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted
automatically when the automatic speaker setup
starts.
: listening area
: listening position
–
• Automatic speaker setup can only be used with
Speakers A.
• Automatic speaker setup cannot be performed
while a pair of headphones is connected, or Speak-
ers B is selected.
• It takes about 15 minutes to complete the auto-
matic speaker setup for three positions. Total mea-
surement time varies depending on the number of
positions and speakers.
• Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone
during the automatic speaker setup, unless you
want to cancel the setup.
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during
the automatic speaker setup.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The onscreen menus shown in this manual may be
slightly different from what you see on your TV.
Press [ENTER].
The automatic speaker setup starts.
3
Auto Speaker Setup
Turn on the AV receiver and the
connected TV.
Do not unplug Setup Mic.
Please keep quiet.
1
Now measuring. . .
On the TV, select the input to which the
AV receiver is connected.
2
Test tones are played through each
Place the speaker setup micro-
2
®
speaker as Audyssey MultEQ XT
phone at measurement point 1
(page 64), and connect it to the
SETUP MIC jack.
Automatic Speaker Setup runs. This
process takes a few minutes. Please
refrain from talking during
measurements and do not stand
between speakers and the microphone.
Auto Speaker Setup
Next
The speaker detect results
appear.
4
1
Auto Speaker Setup
Please place microphone at center of listening area at
ear height.
Next
Retry
Cancel
ENTER
ENTER
Notes:
:Yes
:No
®
•
Before starting Audyssey MultEQ XT
Automatic Speaker Setup, arrange
the room and connect the speakers as
you would for enjoying movies.
Changes to the room after auto setup
requires you run the auto setup again,
as room EQ characteristics may have
changed.
Speaker Detect Result
ENTER
MOVE
ENTER
“Yes” means that the speaker was
detected. “No” means that no speaker
was detected.
If you agree with the results, use
the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons
to select “Next”, and then press
[ENTER].
• When starting the automatic speaker
setup, do not stand between the
speakers and microphone, and avoid
obstacles blocking the path between
speakers and microphone. This will
produce inaccurate results.
• Position the microphone at ear height
of a seated listener with the micro-
phone tip pointed directly at the ceil-
ing using a tripod. Do not hold the
microphone in your hand during
measurements as this will produce
innacurate results.
The options are:
Next: Proceed to the next step.
Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker
setup.
The following screen appears.
5
Auto Speaker Setup
Next
• Make the room as quiet as possible.
Background noise can disrupt the
room measurements. Close win-
dows, silence cell phones, televi-
sions, radios, air conditioners,
fluorescent lights, home appliances,
light dimmers, or other devices.
• Cell phones should be turned off or
placed away from all audio electron-
ics during the measurement process
as Radio Frequency Interference
(RFI) may cause measurement dis-
ruptions (even if the cell phone is not
in use).
2
Please place microphone at next position at ear height.
ENTER
ENTER
Place the setup microphone at
the next position (see page 65),
and then press [ENTER].
Audyssey MultEQ XT performs more
measurements. This takes a few minutes.
®
Auto Speaker Setup
Do not unplug Setup Mic.
Please keep quiet.
Now measuring. . .
2
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When prompted, place the setup
microphone at the next position,
and repeat step 5.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an option, and then
press [ENTER].
6
7
Save:
After the 3rd or 7th measure-
ment, the following screen
appears.
Save the calculated settings and exit
the automatic speaker setup.
Review SP Config:
Review the speaker configuration
settings (see “Reviewing the
Results” on page 69).
Auto Speaker Setup
Next
Finish(Calculate )
Review SP Distance:
Review the speaker distance set-
tings (see “Reviewing the Results”
on page 69).
Select [Next] to measure the next position, or select
[Finish] to calculate the Audyssey MultEQ room EQ
solution.
ENTER
MOVE
ENTER
Review SP Level:
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an option, and then
press [ENTER].
Review the speaker level settings
(see “Reviewing the Results” on
page 69).
Next:
Cancel:
Select “Next” to begin measuring
the next measurement position.
After the 8th measurement has been
taken, the procedure automatically
proceeds to step 8.
Cancel the automatic speaker setup.
If you selected “Save”, the results are
saved, and the following screen
appears.
10
Finish(Calculate):
Select this if you don’t want to
measure any more listening posi-
tions and are ready to calculate the
results, then go to step 8.
Auto Speaker Setup
Saving...
When the measurements are
complete, the following screen
appears.
8
9
Disconnect the setup MIC.
Auto Speaker Setup
11
Auto Speaker Setup
Please, unplug Setup Mic.
Calculating...
When the calculations are com-
plete, the following screen
appears.
Notes:
• When the automatic speaker setup is complete, the
sey.
• You can cancel the automatic speaker setup at any
point in the procedure simply by disconnecting the
setup microphone.
Auto Speaker Setup
Save
Review SP Config
Review SP Distance
Review SP Level
Cancel
ENTER
MOVE
ENTER
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages
Auto Speaker Setup
While the automatic speaker setup is in progress, one of
the following error messages may appear:
Next
Cancel
❑ Ambient noise is too high
:Yes
:No
!
:---
:Error
Auto Speaker Setup
Speaker Detect Error
!
ENTER
MOVE
ENTER
Retry
Cancel
The surround back left speaker has not been detected.
Auto Speaker Setup
Next
Cancel
Ambient noise is too high.
!
ENTER
MOVE
ENTER
!
:Yes
:---
:No
This message appears if the background noise is too
loud and the measurements cannot be performed
properly.
!
:Error
Speaker Detect Error
!
ENTER
MOVE
ENTER
Remove the source of the noise and try again.
Retry: Return to the measured point immediately
before and start set up again.
There is a problem with the front left speaker. If the
warning triangle ( ) appears for the subwoofer, it may
be that the output from the subwoofer is too loud.
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker setup.
❑ Speaker Detect Error
Auto Speaker Setup
Retry
Cancel
Auto Speaker Setup
Next
Cancel
:Yes
:---
:No
!
Speaker Detect Error
!
:Error
ENTER
MOVE
ENTER
Speaker Detect Error
!
ENTER
MOVE
ENTER
The number of speakers detected on the second or
third measurement was different to the number
detected on the first measurement.
This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “Yes”
means that a speaker was detected. “No” means that no
speaker was detected. Check your speaker connections
and retry, or cancel the automatic speaker setup.
Make sure speakers that cannot be detected are con-
nected property.
Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker setup.
Auto Speaker Setup
Next
Cancel
❑ Writing Error!
:Yes
:---
:No
Auto Speaker Setup
!
:Error
Retry
Cancel
Speaker Detect Error
!
ENTER
MOVE
ENTER
The front right speaker has not been detected.
Writing Error!
!
ENTER
MOVE
ENTER
Auto Speaker Setup
Next
Cancel
This message appears if saving fails.
Try saving again. If this message appears after 2 or 3
attempts, the AV receiver is probably malfunctioning.
Contact your Onkyo dealer.
:Yes
:---
:No
!
:Error
Speaker Detect Error
!
Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.
ENTER
MOVE
ENTER
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker setup.
The surround right speaker has not been detected.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reviewing the Results
Changing the Speaker Settings Manually
In rare situations, proper measurements taken may not
be obtainable by the by the automatic speaker setup. For
example, there may be too much noise in the room. If
running the speaker setup a second time is still unsuc-
cessful you will have to set the speaker settings manu-
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select the settings that
you want to review, and then
press [ENTER].
Auto Speaker Setup
Notes:
Save
• For THX-certified speakers, the 80 Hz (THX) cross-
over frequency is recommended. If you use the auto-
matic speaker setup, you’ll need to manually select
80 Hz (THX) for each THX-certified speaker (see
Review SP Config
Review SP Distance
Review SP Level
Cancel
ENTER
MOVE
ENTER
• Because of the complexities of low-frequency sounds
and the way they interact with a room, THX recom-
mends setting the subwoofer level and distance manu-
ally.
The options are:
Review SP Config
Review the speaker configuration
settings.
Using a Powered Subwoofer
If you’re using a powered subwoofer and it outputs very
low-frequency sound at a low volume level, it may not be
detected by the automatic speaker setup.
Auto Speaker Setup
Review SP Config
Subwoofer
Front
Yes
Full Band
80Hz
100Hz
150Hz
2ch
If the “Subwoofer” appears on the “Review SP Config”
screen as “No”, increase the subwoofer’s volume to the
half-way point, set it to its highest crossover frequency,
and then try running the automatic speaker setup again.
Note that if the volume is set too high and the sound dis-
torts, detection issues may occur, so use an appropriate
volume level. If the subwoofer has a low-pass filter
switch, set it to Off or Direct. Refer to your subwoofer’s
instruction manual for details.
Center
Surround
Surr Back
Surr Back Ch
RETURN
RETURN
Review SP Distance
Review the speaker distance set-
tings.
Auto Speaker Setup
Review SP Distance
Left
15.0ft
15.0ft
15.0ft
7.0ft
Center
Rightr
Surr Right
SurrBack
Surr Left
Subwoofer
7.0ft
7.0ft
15.0ft
RETURN
RETURN
Review SP Level
Review the speaker level settings.
Auto Speaker Setup
Review SP Level
Left
+12.0dB
0.0dB
-12.0dB
+3.0dB
+4.0dB
-3.0dB
0.0dB
Center
Rightr
Surr Right
SurrBack
Surr Left
Subwoofer
RETURN
RETURN
Press [RETURN] to return to the pre-
vious screen.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations
Selecting the Input Source
ON
STANDBY
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
1
GAME/TV
4
+
TV CH
-
AUX1
5
AUX2
6
4
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
1
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
11
12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
4
DIMMER
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
1
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
2
SP
A
SP
B
LISTENING MODE
Use the AV receiver’s input selector buttons to select an input source.
1
2
Remote
controller
AV receiver
To select an input source with the remote controller, press its
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button, and then use its INPUT SELECTOR
buttons.
Remote
To switch between Speakers A and Speak-
ers B, use the remote controller’s [SP A] and
[SP B] buttons (TX-NR906 only).
A and B indicators
controller
Start playback on the source component.
3
4
When you select DVD or another video component, on your TV, you’ll need to select
the video input that’s connected to the AV receiver’s COMPONENT VIDEO MONI-
TOR OUT, HDMI OUT MAIN, HDMI OUT SUB, or MONITOR OUT.
On some DVD players, you may need to turn on the digital audio output.
To adjust the volume, use the MASTER VOLUME control, or the remote
controller’s VOL [q]/[w] button.
Remote
controller
AV receiver
The volume can be set to −∞ dB, −81.5 dB through +18.0 dB (relative display).
The AV receiver is designed for home theater enjoyment. It has a wide volume range,
allowing precise adjustment.
Select a listening mode and enjoy!
5
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This section explains functions that can be used with any
input source.
Adjusting Speaker Levels
V C
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listen-
ing to an input source. These temporary adjustments are
cancelled when the AV receiver is set to Standby.
TU
8
TAPE
7
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
CLEAR
12
0
-- --- 10
11
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
Press
[RECEIVER]
first
Use the remote controller’s
[CH SEL] button to select each
speaker, and use the [LEVEL–]
and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust
the volume.
You can adjust the volume of each
speaker from –12 dB to +12 dB
(–15 dB to +12 dB for the subwoofer).
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
DIMMER
DISPLAY
SLEEP
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
MUTING
DISPLAY
MUTING
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
SP
A
SP
B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
Notes:
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
• You cannot use this function while the AV receiver is
muted.
• Speakers that are set to “No” or “None” in the
“Speaker Config” cannot be adjusted (see page 95).
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
CH SEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
LEVEL – +
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
DVD
RC-687
M
■ Headphones
While a pair of headphones is connected, you can use the
[CH SEL], [LEVEL–], and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust
the volume of each headphone speaker (left and right),
from –12 dB to +12 dB each.
These settings are stored when the AV receiver is set to
Standby.
PHONES
DIMMER
DISPLAY
Muting the AV Receiver
You can temporarily mute the output of the AV receiver.
Setting the Display Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the display.
Press the remote controller’s
[MUTING] button.
The output is muted and the MUTING
indicator flashes on the display, as
shown.
Remote
controller
Press the remote controller’s
[DIMMER] button repeatedly to
select:
• Normal + VOLUME light on.
• Normal + VOLUME light off.
AV receiver
• Dim + VOLUME light off.
• Dimmer + VOLUME light off.
To unmute the AV receiver, press the
[MUTING] button again, or adjust the
volume.
The Mute function is cancelled when
the AV receiver is set to Standby.
You can also use the AV receiver’s
[DIMMER] button (not European mod-
els).
Tip:
• You can specify how much the output is muted with
the “Muting Level” setting (see page 115).
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Sleep Timer
Adjusting the Bass & Treble
With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver to turn
off automatically after a specified period.
You can adjust the bass and treble for the front speakers,
except when the Direct, Pure Audio or THX listening
mode is selected.
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
and then press the [SLEEP] but-
ton repeatedly to select the
required sleep time.
The sleep time can be set from 90 to 10
minutes in 10 minute steps.
Press the AV receiver’s [TONE]
1
button repeatedly to select Bass
or Treble for Front, Center, Sur-
round, SurrBack, or Subwoofer.
Use the Up [r] and Down [e]
2
buttons to adjust.
The SLEEP indicator appears on the
display when the sleep timer has been
set. The specified sleep time appears on
the display for about five seconds, then
the previous display reappears.
■ Bass
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds output by the
front speakers from –10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
If you need to cancel the sleep timer, press the [SLEEP]
button repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator disappears.
■ Treble
To check the time remaining until the AV receiver sleeps,
press the [SLEEP] button. Note that if you press the
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds output by
the front speakers from –10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
[SLEEP] button while the sleep time is being displayed,
Notes:
you’ll shorten the sleep time by 10 minutes.
• This setting is not available when the multichannel
Analog input is selected.
• The tone can be adjusted for Speakers A or Speakers
B. The same values are used for both.
• The tone control settings do not apply to the Direct,
Pure Audio, or THX listening modes.
Using Headphones
For private listening, you can connect a pair of stereo
headphones (1/4-inch phone plug) to the AV receiver’s
PHONES jack.
Displaying Source Information
You can display various information about the current
input source as follows.
Remote
controller
Press the [DISPLAY] button
repeatedly to cycle through the
available information.
AV receiver
Notes:
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your
headphones.
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES
jack, the speakers are turned off and the Headphone
indicator lights up. (The Powered Zone 2 speakers are
not turned off.)
The following information can typically be displayed:
Input source
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio.
Listening
mode
• Only the Stereo, Direct, Pure Audio, and Mono listen-
ing modes can be used with headphones (the listening
modes available also depend on the currently selected
input source).
• When the multichannel input is used, only the front
left and right audio can be heard in the headphones.
Signal format*
Sampling
frequency
*
If the input signal is analog, no format information is displayed.
If the input signal is PCM, the sampling frequency is displayed.
If the input signal is digital but not PCM, the signal format and
the number of channels is displayed. For some digital input sig-
nals, including multichannel PCM, the signal format, number of
channels, and sampling frequency is displayed.
Information is displayed for about three seconds, then the previ-
ously displayed information reappears.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio
■ Manual Tuning Mode
Listening to AM/FM Stations
Press the [TUNING MODE] but-
ton so that the AUTO indicator
disappears from the display.
1
2
TUNING MODE
TUNING
Press and hold the TUNING Up or
Down [q]/[w] button.
The frequency stops changing when
you release the button.
Press the button repeatedly to change
the frequency one step at a time.
TUNER
With the built-in tuner, you can enjoy AM and FM radio
stations and store your favorite stations as presets for
easy selection.
The North American model changes FM frequency in
0.2 MHz steps, 10 kHz steps for AM. For other models
it’s 0.05 MHz steps for FM and 9 kHz steps for AM.
In Manual Tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.
Use the [TUNER] input selector
button to select AM or FM.
In this example, FM has been selected.
Tuning into Weak FM Stereo Stations
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be
impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to
Manual Tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.
Band
Frequency
(Actual display depends on country.)
Tuning into AM/FM Radio Stations
■ Auto Tuning Mode
Press the [TUNING MODE] but-
ton so that the AUTO indicator
appears on the display.
1
Press the TUNING Up or Down
2
[q]/[w] button.
Searching stops when a station is
found.
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
appears. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM
STEREO indicator also appears. (The FM STEREO
indicator will not appear on models that have HD
Radio.)
TUNED
AUTO
FM STEREO
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Tuning into Stations by Frequency
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by enter-
ing the appropriate frequency.
Displaying AM/FM Radio Information
DISPLAY
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
Number
buttons
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
CLEAR
12
0
D.TUN
-- --- 10
11
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
Press the [DISPLAY] button to
display the available information.
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [D.TUN] button.
The [RECEIVER] button flashes.
Band
Frequency
Preset #
1
2
Listening mode
Note:
(Actual display depends on country.)
When you select a preset with a custom name (see
page 110), its name is displayed instead of the band and
frequency.
Within 8 seconds, use the num-
ber buttons to enter the fre-
quency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM),
press 8, 7, 5.
Note:
While the [RECEIVER] button is flash-
ing, you cannot select another input
source with the remote controller.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Presets
Presetting AM/FM Stations
PRESET
2, 4
3
TV
CABLE
SAT
SLEEP
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite
AM and FM radio stations.
DIMMER
+
CH
Tune into the AM or FM station
CH +/–
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
1
-
you want to store as a preset.
PREV
CH
MUTING
Press the [MEMORY] button.
2
The preset number flashes.
To select a preset, use the PRE-
SET [e]/[r] buttons or the
remote controller’s CH [+/–] but-
ton.
While the preset number is flash-
3
ing (about 8 seconds), use the
PRESET [e]/[r] buttons to
select a preset from 1 through 40.
Press the [MEMORY] button
4
again to store the station.
The station is stored and the preset
number stops flashing.
Deleting Presets
Repeat this procedure for all of your
favorite stations.
2
Note:
You can name your radio presets for easy identification
Select the preset that you want to
delete.
See the previous section.
1
2
While holding down the [MEM-
ORY] button, press the [TUNING
MODE] button.
The preset is deleted and its number
disappears from the display.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV CH
GAME/TV
AUX1
AUX
2
-
TUN
8
Listening to HD Radio™ Stations
(North American model only)
TAPE
7
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
CLEAR
12
0
-- --- 10
11
/
HD Radio technology brings digital radio to conven-
tional analog AM and FM radio stations, with improved
sound quality, better reception, and new data services.
HD Radio technology provides CD-quality sound for
FM stations and FM-quality sound for AM stations. In
addition, FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple
programs on the same frequency by using multicast
channels. Text data display incudes station name, song
title, artist name, and so on.
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
,
ENTER
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
For more information about HD Radio technology, visit:
www.ibiquity.com
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
MUTING
www.hdradio.com
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
SP
A
SP
B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
About HD Radio Stations
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
HD Radio stations broadcast on the same AM and FM
frequencies they’ve always used, and you can receive
them by tuning into your favorite station as normal (see
FM stations (see page 75).
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
DVD
AUDIO SEL
RC-687
M
If the current AM or FM station supports HD Radio tech-
nology, the HD indicator lights up.
AUDIO SEL
While a digital HD Radio transmission is being received,
the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an analog HD
Radio transmission is being received, the ANALOG
indicator lights up.
Station name
HD indicator
ENTER
DISPLAY
Song title
Artist name
HD Radio channel number
• If the current AM or FM station supports HD Radio
technology, the station’s name will be displayed
instead of the band and frequency.
• When music data is received, song title and artist
name information is displayed.
• If the current HD Radio station supports multicast
channels, the name of the currently selected multicast
channel will be displayed.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDS Program Types (PTY)
Using RDS
Type
Display
RDS only works in areas where RDS broadcasts are
available. When tuned to an RDS station, the RDS indi-
cator appears.
None
NONE
News reports
Current affairs
Information
Sport
NEWS
AFFAIRS
INFO
RDS indicator
SPORT
Education
EDUCATE
DRAMA
Drama
Culture
CULTURE
SCIENCE
VARIED
Science and technology
Varied
■ What is RDS?
RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of
transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was developed
by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is avail-
able in most European countries. RDS is approved by the
National Radio Systems Committee (NRSC) and is
available in North America.
Many FM stations use it these days. In addition to dis-
playing text information, RDS can also help you find
radio stations by type (e.g., news, sport, rock, etc.).
The AV receiver supports four types of RDS informa-
tion:
Pop music
Rock music
Middle of the road music
Light classics
Serious classics
Other music
Weather
POP M
ROCK M
EASY M
LIGHT M
CLASSICS
OTHER M
WEATHER
FINANCE
CHILDREN
SOCIAL
RELIGION
PHONE IN
TRAVEL
LEISURE
JAZZ
Finance
Children’s programmes
Social affairs
Religion
PS (Program Service)
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS
information, the station’s name will be displayed. Press-
ing the [DISPLAY] button will display the frequency for
3 seconds.
Phone in
Travel
Leisure
RT (Radio Text)
Jazz music
Country music
National music
Oldies music
Folk music
Documentary
Alarm test
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text
information, the text will be shown on the display (see
page 78).
COUNTRY
NATION M
OLDIES
FOLK M
DOCUMENT
TEST
PTY (Program Type)
This allows you to search RDS radio stations by type
(see page 78).
TP (Traffic Program)
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that
broadcast traffic information (see page 78).
Alarm
ALARM
Notes:
• In some cases, the characters displayed on the AV
receiver may not be identical to those broadcast by the
radio station. Also, unexpected characters may be dis-
played when unsupported characters are received.
This is not a malfunction.
• If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data
may be displayed intermittently or not at all.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying Radio Text (RT)
To start the search, press
[ENTER].
The AV receiver searches until it finds
a station of the type you specified, at
which point it stops briefly before con-
tinuing with the search.
4
5
RT/PTY/TP
When a station you want to listen
to is found, press [ENTER].
If no stations are found, the message
“Not Found” appears.
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text
information, the text can be displayed.
Listening to Traffic News (TP)
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
once.
2
1
The RT information scrolls across the
display.
Notes:
• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV
receiver waits for the RT information.
• If the message “No Text Data” appears on the display,
no RT information is available.
3
Finding Stations by Type (PTY)
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic news.
2
3 1
4, 5
Use the [TUNER] input selector
button to select FM.
1
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
three times.
2
If the current radio station is broadcast-
ing TP (Traffic Program), “[TP]” will
appear on the display and traffic news
will be heard as and when it’s broad-
cast. If “TP” without square brackets
appears, this means that the station is
not broadcasting TP.
You can search for radio stations by type.
Use the [TUNER] input selector
button to select FM.
1
2
To locate a station that is broad-
3
casting TP, press [ENTER].
The AV receiver searches until it finds
a station that’s broadcasting TP.
If no stations are found, the message
“Not Found” appears.
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
twice.
The current program type appears on
the display.
Use the PRESET [e]/[r] buttons
to select the type of program you
want.
3
See the table on page 77.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note:
Selecting Multicast Channels
Multicast channels 2 through 8 only carry a digital sig-
nal, so to select an audio format, you must select multi-
cast channel #1 first.
FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple programs
on the same frequency by using what are called multicast
channels. If the current HD Radio station is broadcasting
multicast channels, the SPS (secondary program ser-
vices) indicator lights up.
Displaying HD Radio Information
Press the [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to cycle through
the available information.
Press [ENTER].
The SPS indicator flashes.
1
Frequency
Use the Up and Down Arrow
2
Station information
[q]/[w] buttons to select a multi-
cast channel.
If you select a multicast channel that is
not currently broadcasting, a plus [+]
symbol will appear, indicating that the
channel has been reserved. When
broadcasting commences, that channel
will be selected automatically.
Artist information
Song title information
Reserved channel indication
HD Radio channel number
Within 5 seconds, press [ENTER] to set
the multicast channel.
Note:
Multicast channels are not available on
AM.
Selecting the Audio Format (Blend Mode)
HD Radio stations transmit both analog and digital ver-
sions of their programs and you can choose which one
you want to listen to.
Remote
controller
Use the [AUDIO SEL] button to
select “Auto” or “Analog”.
AV receiver
Auto: Select to use the digital sig-
nal.
Analog: Select to use the analog sig-
nal.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
This section explains how to record the input source and
how to record audio and video from separate sources.
Recording from Different AV Sources
You can overdub audio onto your video recordings by
simultaneously recording audio and video from two sep-
arate sources. This is possible because only the audio
source is switched when an audio-only input source,
such as TAPE, TUNER, or CD, is selected, the video
source remains the same.
Notes:
• The surround sound and DSP listening modes cannot
be recorded.
• Copy-protected DVDs cannot be recorded.
• Sources connected to the analog multichannel input
cannot be recorded.
• Various restrictions apply to digital recording. Refer
to the manuals supplied with your digital recording
equipment for more details.
• Digital input signals are output by only the digital out-
puts, and analog input signals are output by only the
analog outputs. There is no internal conversion from
digital to analog or vice versa.
In the following example, audio from the CD player con-
nected to the CD IN and video from the camcorder con-
nected to the AUX 2 INPUT VIDEO jack are recorded
by the VCR connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks.
• DTS signals will be recorded as noise, so don’t
attempt analog recording of DTS CDs or LDs.
• While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the
VCR/DVR OUT V and S jacks don’t output video sig-
nals, so select another mode when recording.
Camcorder
video signal
audio signal
Recording the Input Source
Audio sources can be recorded to a recorder (e.g., cas-
sette deck, CDR, MD) connected to the TAPE OUT or
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT jacks. Video sources can be
recorded to a video recorder (e.g., VCR, DVR) con-
nected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks. See pages 33 to 50
for hookup information.
Use the input selector buttons to
select the source that you want
to record.
1
Use?” on page 34 to see which signals
can be output and recorded.
CD Player
VCR
You can watch the source while record-
ing it. The AV receiver’s MASTER
VOLUME control has no effect on
Prepare the camcorder and CD player for
playback.
Remote
1
controller
recording.
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
3
AUX
6
2
Prepare the VCR for recording.
2
3
4
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
PHONO
+10
NET/USB
0
Press the [AUX 2] input selector button.
Press the [CD] input selector button.
This selects the CD player as the audio source but
leaves the camcorder as the video source.
On your recorder, start record-
ing.
2
3
Start recording on the VCR, then start
playback on the camcorder and CD player.
Video from the camcorder and audio from the CD
player are recorded by the VCR.
On the source component, start
playback.
5
Note:
If you select a different input source during recording,
that input source will be recorded instead.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes
Selecting with the Remote Controller
Selecting the Listening Modes
For a description of each listening mode, see “About the
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes
can only be selected if your DVD player is
connected to the AV receiver with a digital
audio connection (coaxial, optical, or HDMI).
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
• The listening modes you can select depends
on the format of the input signal. To check
the format, see “Displaying Source Informa-
SURR
SP
A
SP
B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
,
STEREO
STEREO
PURE A
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
ALL ST
THX
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
DIRECT
• While a pair of headphones is connected,
you can only select the Pure Audio, Mono,
Direct, or Stereo listening mode.
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
DVD
RC-687
M
Selecting on the AV Receiver
■ [STEREO] button
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.
STEREO
THX
■ [SURR] button
This button selects the Dolby Digital and DTS listen-
ing modes.
■ LISTENING MODE [e]/[r] buttons
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all
of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-
rent input source.
■ [PURE A] button
LISTENING MODE
PURE AUDIO
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s dis-
play is turned off and only video signals input
through HDMI IN can be output.
■ [PURE AUDIO] button
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s dis-
play is turned off and only video signals input
through HDMI IN can be output. Pressing this but-
ton again will select the previous listening mode.
■ [DIRECT] button
This button selects the Direct listening mode.
■ [THX] button
■ [STEREO] button
This button selects the THX listening modes.
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.
■ [ALL ST] button
■ [THX] button
This button selects the All Channel Stereo listening
This button selects the THX listening modes.
mode.
■ LISTENING MODE [e]/[r] buttons
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all
of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-
rent input source.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening Modes Available for Each Source Format
Analog and PCM Sources
✔: Available Listening Modes
Multichannel PCM
Analog/PCM
Multi
*1
*2
32–96 kHz
2ch
176.4/192 kHz
2ch
32–96
176.4/
Source format
channel
Analog
Multi
channel
Mono/Mul
tiplex
Multi
channel
Mono/Mul
tiplex
*1
*2
kHz
192kHz
Media
CD, TV, radio,
DVD
DVD
DVD
Listening Mode
Pure Audio
Direct
Stereo
Mono
Multichannel
Neo:6
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*4
✔
*7
*5*7
Neural THX
✔
✔
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music
Dolby PLII Game/
*4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*3
*4
✔
*3
*3
Dolby PLIIx Game
*4
Dolby EX
✔
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
✔
✔
✔
✔
*5
✔
THX Cinema/Music/Games
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Movie
+ THX Cinema
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Music
*3
*4
*3
✔
*5
✔
✔
✔
✔
*3
*3
*4
*3
✔
*5
✔
+ THX Music
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Game
*3
*5
✔
+ THX Games
Neo:6 Cinema/Music
✔
✔
*5
+THX Cinema/Music
Neo:6 + THX
*4
✔
Cinema/Music/Game
PLII Game
+ THX Ultra2 Games
✔
✔
*4
THX Surround EX
✔
THX Ultra2
Cinema/Music/Games
*4
✔
Neural THX
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games
*7
*7
✔
✔
✔
*5
*5*6
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
MonoMovie
*5*6
Orchestra
*5*6
Unplugged
*5*6
Studio-Mix
*5*6
✔
✔
✔
✔
TV Logic
AllChStereo
FullMono
*6
T-D
*1. 32/44.1/48/88.2/96kHz
*2. DVD-Audio discs output multichannel 176.4/192 kHz PCM only via HDMI.
*3. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*4. Cannot be selected with some source formats.
*5. Available only when using surround speakers.
*6. PCM of 88.2kHz and 96kHz are processed at 44.1kHz and 48kHz respectively.
*7. It is possible to select it by the signal of 32-48kHz.
: Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
: Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolby Digital, and Dolby Digital Plus Sources
✔: Available Listening Modes
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
Source format
Multichannel
2ch
Mono/Multiplex Multichannel
2ch
Mono/Multiplex
Media
DVD, DTV, etc.
Blu-ray, HD DVD
Listening Mode
Pure Audio
Direct
Stereo
Mono
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*3
*3
✔
Neo:6
✔
*4
*4
Neural THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
DolbyDigital
*1
DolbyDigital Plus
✔
✔
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game
*3
*3
*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2
*2
*3
✔
✔
*2
*3
*3
Dolby EX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
✔
✔
*4
✔
✔
THX Cinema/Music/Games
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Movie
+ THX Cinema
*3
*2
*3
*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*4
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Music
*3
*2
*3
*2
✔
✔
✔
*4
+ THX Music
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Game
+ THX Games
*2
*2
✔
✔
*4
Neo:6 Cinema/Music
+ THX Cinema/Music
✔
✔
*4
Neo:6 + THX
Cinema/Music/Game
*3
*3
✔
✔
PLII Game
+ THX Ultra2 Games
THX Surround EX
✔
✔
*3
*3
*3
✔
✔
✔
THX Ultra2
Cinema/Music/Games
*3
✔
Neural THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games*4
*4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
MonoMovie
*4
Orchestra
*4
Unplugged
*4
Studio-Mix
*4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
TV Logic
AllChStereo
FullMono
T-D
*1. If there are no surround back speakers, depending on the input signal, Dolby Digital may be used.
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*3. Cannot be selected with some source formats.
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.
: Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
: Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Note:
With some HD DVD and Blu-ray discs, a noise may be heard during playback. This may occur when the audio format
changes during playback. It is not a malfunction.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DTS Sources
✔: Available Listening Modes
DTS, DTS96/24
DTS-ES
Discrete/Matrix
Source format
Media
Multichannel
2ch
Mono
DVD, CD, etc.
DVD, CD, etc.
Listening Mode
Pure Audio
Direct
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Stereo
Mono
DTS, DTS 96/24
*1
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
Neo:6
✔
*3
✔
*5
*4*5
Neural THX
✔
✔
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie
*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music
*3
✔
*2
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game
*2
*3
Dolby EX
✔
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*4
THX Cinema/Music/Games
*4
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
*1
✔
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Movie
+ THX Cinema/Music
*3
*2
✔
✔
*4
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Music
+ THX Music
*2
✔
*4
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Game
+ THX Games
*2
✔
*4
Neo:6 Cinema/Music
+ THX Cinema/Music
✔
*4
Neo:6 + THX
Cinema/Music/Game
*3
✔
PLII Game
+ THX Ultra2 Games
THX Surround EX
✔
*3
✔
THX Ultra2
Cinema/Music/Games
*3
✔
Neural THX
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games
*5
*5
✔
✔
*4
*4 *5
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
MonoMovie
*4*5
Orchestra
*4*5
Unplugged
*4*5
Studio-Mix
*4*5
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
TV Logic
AllChStereo
FullMono
*5
T-D
*1. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, DTS is used.
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*3. Cannot be selected with some source formats.
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.
*5. DTS 96/24 is processed as DTS.
: Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
: Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TrueHD Sources
✔: Available Listening Modes
TrueHD
TrueHD 192kHz
Source format
Multichannel
2ch
Mono/Multiplex Multichannel
2ch
Mono/Multiplex
Media
Blu-ray, HD DVD
Blu-ray, HD DVD
Listening Mode
Pure Audio
Direct
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Stereo
Mono
TrueHD
✔
*2
Neo:6
✔
*4
*3*4
Neural THX
✔
✔
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie
*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1
*1
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music
*2
✔
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game
*1
*2
Dolby EX
✔
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
✔
✔
*3
✔
THX Cinema/Music/Games
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Movie
+ THX Cinema
*2
*1
✔
✔
*3
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Music
+ THX Music
*2
*1
✔
✔
*3
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Game
+ THX Games
*1
✔
*3
Neo:6 Cinema/Music
+ THX Cinema/Music
✔
*3
Neo:6 + THX
Cinema/Music/Game
*2
✔
PLII Game
+ THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Surround EX
✔
*2
✔
THX Ultra2
Cinema/Music/Games
*2
✔
Neural THX
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games
*4
*4
✔
✔
*3
*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
MonoMovie
*3
Orchestra
*3
Unplugged
*3
Studio-Mix
*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
TV Logic
AllChStereo
FullMono
T-D
*1. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*2. Cannot be selected with some source formats.
*3. Available only when using surround speakers.
*4. It is possible to select it by the signal of 32-48kHz.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
:
:
Note:
With some HD DVD and Blu-ray discs, a noise may be heard during playback. This may occur when the audio format
changes during playback. It is not a malfunction.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DTS-HD Sources
✔: Available Listening Modes
DTS-HD Master Audio 192kHz
Multi
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
Source format
Media
Multi
channel
Multi
channel
2ch
Mono
2ch
Mono
2ch
Mono
channel
Blu-ray, HD DVD
Blu-ray, HD DVD
Blu-ray, HD DVD
Listening Mode
Pure Audio
Direct
Stereo
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Mono
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
✔
✔
*2
*2
Neo:6
✔
✔
*4
*3*4
*4
*3*4
Neural THX
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2
*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1
*2
*2
✔
✔
*1
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game
*1
*2
*2
Dolby EX
✔
✔
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
✔
✔
✔
✔
*3
✔
✔
THX Cinema/Music/Games
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Movie
*2
*1
*2
*1
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*3
+ THX Cinema
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Music
*2
*1
*2
*1
✔
✔
*3
+ THX Music
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Game
*1
*1
✔
✔
*3
+ THX Games
Neo:6 Cinema/Music
✔
✔
*3
+ THX Cinema/Music
Neo:6 + THX
*2
*2
✔
✔
Cinema/Music/Game
PLII Game
+ THX Ultra2 Games
THX Surround EX
✔
✔
*2
*2
*2
*2
✔
✔
✔
THX Ultra2
Cinema/Music/Games
✔
Neural THX
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games
*4
*4
*4
*4
✔
✔
✔
✔
*3
*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
MonoMovie
*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Orchestra
*3
Unplugged
*3
Studio-Mix
*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
TV Logic
AllChStereo
FullMono
T-D
*1. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*2. Cannot be selected with some source formats.
*3. Available only when using surround speakers.
*4. It is possible to select it by the signal of 32-48kHz.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
:
:
Note:
With some HD DVD and Blu-ray discs, a noise may be heard during playback. This may occur when the audio format
changes during playback. It is not a malfunction.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DTS Express and DSD Sources
✔: Available Listening Modes
*1
DTS Express
Source format
DSD
Multichannel
Multichannel
2ch
Mono
2ch
(3/2.1)
Media
Blu-ray, HD DVD
SACD
Listening Mode
Pure Audio
Direct
Stereo
Mono
DTS Express
DSD
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*3
Neo:6
✔
*4
*4
Neural THX
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music
Dolby PLII Game/
*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2
*3
✔
*2
*2
Dolby PLIIx Game
*3
Dolby EX
✔
✔
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
✔
✔
✔
✔
*4
✔
✔
✔
THX Cinema/Music/Games
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Movie
*3
*2
*2
✔
✔
✔
*4
+ THX Cinema
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Music
*3
*2
*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
*4
+ THX Music
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Game
*2
*2
✔
✔
*4
+ THX Games
Neo:6 Cinema/Music
✔
✔
*4
+ THX Cinema/Music
Neo:6 + THX
*3
✔
✔
Cinema/Music/Game
PLII Game
+ THX Ultra2 Games
THX Surround EX
THX Ultra2
Cinema/Music/Games
✔
✔
*3
✔
✔
✔
*3
✔
Neural THX
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games
✔
✔
✔
✔
*4
*4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
MonoMovie
*4
Orchestra
*4
Unplugged
*4
Studio-Mix
*4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
TV Logic
AllChStereo
FullMono
T-D
*1. DSD sources are converted and handled as PCM.
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*3. Cannot be selected with some source formats.
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
:
:
If you can select PCM or DSD output on your SACD player, in some cases, selecting PCM will provide
the best sound quality.
Hint!
Note:
With some HD DVD and Blu-ray discs, a noise may be heard during playback. This may occur when the audio format
changes during playback. It is not a malfunction.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
About the Listening Modes
Dolby Pro Logic II
The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with
high fidelity and stunning surround sound.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx expands any 2-channel source for
7.1-channel playback. It provides a very natural and
seamless surround-sound experience that fully envelops
the listener. As well as music and movies, video games
can also benefit from the dramatic spatial effects and
vivid imaging. If you’re not using any surround back
speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II will be used instead of
Dolby Pro Logic IIx.
The LISTENING MODE button illustration shows
that listening modes can be selected.
Button:
PURE A
The LISTENING MODE button illustration shows
the remote controller buttons with the exception of
the [PURE A] button (All buttons with the exception
of the [PURE A] button are on both the AV receiver
and the remote controller).
•
Dolby PLIIx Movie
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV, DVD, VHS).
information on the use of the LISTENING MODE
buttons.
•
Dolby PLIIx Music
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) music source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette,
TV, VHS, DVD).
Pure Audio
Button:
PURE A
•
Dolby PLIIx Game
Use this mode with video games, especially those
that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo.
PURE AUDIO
In this mode, the display and video circuitry are turned
off, minimizing possible noise sources for the ultimate in
high-fidelity reproduction. (As the video circuitry is
turned off, only video signals input through HDMI IN
can be output.)
Dolby Digital
Use this mode with DVDs that bear the Dolby Digital
logo, and Dolby Digital TV broadcasts. This is the most
common digital surround-sound format, and it’ll put you
right in the middle of the action, just like being in a
movie theater or concert hall.
Note:
• The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected
while Zone 2 is on.
Direct
Button:
5.1-channel source + Dolby EX
DIRECT
These modes expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. They’re especially suited to Dolby EX
soundtracks that include a matrix-encoded surround
back channel. The additional channel adds an extra
dimension and provides an enveloping surround sound
experience, perfect for rotating and fly-by sound effects.
In this mode, audio from the input source is output
directly with minimal processing, providing high-fidel-
ity reproduction. All of the source’s audio channels are
output as they are.
Stereo
Button:
STEREO
Sound is output by the front left and right speakers and
subwoofer.
Dolby Digital Plus
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-
tichannel audio format from Dolby. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 48 kHz sampling rate.
Mono
Use this mode when watching an old movie with a mono
soundtrack, or use it with the foreign language
soundtracks recorded in the left and right channels of some
movies. It can also be used with DVDs or other sources
containing multiplexed audio, such as karaoke DVDs.
Multichannel
This mode is for use with analog or PCM multichannel
sources.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolby TrueHD
DTS Neo:6
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-
mats, this new Dolby format offers up to 7.1 discrete
channels of digital audio with 48/96 kHz, up to 5.1-chan-
nels with 192 kHz sampling rate.
This mode expands any 2-channel source for up to 7.1-
channel playback. It uses seven full-bandwidth channels
of matrix decoding for matrix-encoded material, provid-
ing a very natural and seamless surround sound experi-
ence that fully envelops the listener.
•
Neo:6 Cinema
Use this mode with any stereo movie (e.g., TV,
DVD, VHS).
5.1-channel source + Dolby PLIIx Music
These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode to
expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-channel playback.
•
Neo:6 Music
Use this mode with any stereo music source (e.g.,
CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).
5.1-channel source + Dolby PLIIx Movie
These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie mode
to expand 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.
5.1-channel source + Neo:6
This mode uses Neo:6 to expand 5.1-channel sources for
6.1/7.1-channel playback.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-
tichannel audio format from DTS. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 96 kHz sampling rate.
The DTS digital surround-sound format supports up to
5.1 discrete channels and uses less compression for high-
fidelity reproduction. Use it with DVDs and CDs that
bear the DTS logo.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS 96/24
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-
mats, this new DTS format offers up to 7.1 discrete chan-
nels of digital audio with 48/96 kHz, up to 5.1-channels
with 192 kHz sampling rate.
This mode is for use with DTS 96/24 sources. This is
high-resolution DTS with a 96 kHz sampling rate and
24-bit resolution, providing superior fidelity. Use it with
DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.
DTS-ES Discrete
For the signals supported by the AV receiver, see
page 86.
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete soundtracks,
which use a discrete surround back channel for true
6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven totally separate
audio channels provide better spatial imaging and 360-
degree sound localization, perfect for sounds that pan
across the surround channels. Use it with DVDs that bear
the DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Dis-
crete soundtrack.
DTS Express
This format supports up to 5.1 channels and a lower sam-
pling rate of 48 kHz. Applications include interactive
audio and commentary encoding for HD DVD Sub
Audio and Blu-ray Secondary Audio. Also broadcast
and media servers.
DTS-ES Matrix
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix soundtracks,
which use a matrix-encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-
ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Matrix
soundtrack.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Neural THX 5.1/7.1
•
•
THX Games
Neural-THX Surround employs psychoacoustic fre-
quency domain processing, which allows delivery of a
more detailed sound stage, with superior channel separa-
tion and localization of audio elements. The Neural THX
5.1 and Neural THX 7.1 modes can expand any 2-chan-
nel stereo source for 5.1- or 7.1-channel playback,
respectively. Use them with CD, radio, cassette, TV,
VHS, DVD, and other 2-channel stereo sources, includ-
ing video games. Neural-THX Surround can also be
used by broadcasters to encode and transmit surround-
sound content over a stereo signal, which listeners can
enjoy as either surround sound or normal stereo. XM
Satellite Radio, for example, is using Neural-THX Sur-
round on select channels, which the AV receiver can
expand from 5.1 channels to 7.1 channels.
THX Games mode is meant for spatially accurate
playback of game audio, which is often mixed simi-
larly to movies but in a smaller environment. THX
Loudness Plus is configured for game audio levels,
with Timbre Matching active.
THX Ultra2 Cinema
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-
channel playback. It does this by analyzing the com-
position of the surround source, optimizing the
ambient and directional sounds to produce the sur-
round back channel output.
•
•
THX Ultra2 Music
This mode is designed for use with music. It expands
5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.
THX Ultra2 Games
This mode is designed for use with video games. It
can expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-channel
playback.
DSD
DSD stands for Direct Stream Digital and is the format
used to store digital audio on Super Audio CDs (SACD).
This mode can be used with SACDs that feature multi-
channel audio.
•
THX Surround EX
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby
Digital EX sources. THX Surround EX, also known
as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is a joint develop-
ment between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.
THX
Founded by George Lucas, THX develops stringent stan-
dards that ensure movies are reproduced in movie the-
aters and home theaters just as the director intended.
THX Modes carefully optimize the tonal and spatial
characteristics of the soundtrack for reproduction in the
home-theater environment. They can be used with 2-
channel matrixed and multichannel sources.
Surround back speaker output depends on the source
material and the selected listening mode.
•
THX Cinema
THX Cinema mode corrects theatrical soundtracks
for playback in a home theater environment. In this
mode, THX Loudness Plus is configured for cinema
levels and Re-EQ, Timbre Matching, and Adaptive
Decorrelation are active.
•
THX Music
THX Music mode is tailored for listening to music,
which is typically mastered at significantly higher
levels than movies. In this mode, THX Loudness
Plus is configured for music playback and only Tim-
bre Matching is active.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Onkyo Original DSP Modes
Mono Movie
This mode is suitable for old movies and other mono
sources. The center speaker outputs the sound as it is,
while reverb is applied to the sound output by the other
speakers, giving presence to even mono material.
Orchestra
Suitable for classical or operatic music, this mode
emphasizes the surround channels in order to widen the
stereo image, and simulates the natural reverberation of
a large hall.
Unplugged
Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals, and jazz, this
mode emphasizes the front stereo image, giving the
impression of being right in front of the stage.
Studio-Mix
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to music in this
mode creates a lively sound field with a powerful acous-
tic image, like being at a club or rock concert.
TV Logic
This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV shows pro-
duced in a TV studio, surround effects to the entire
sound, and clarity to voices.
All Ch Stereo
Ideal for background music, this mode fills the entire lis-
tening area with stereo sound from the front, surround,
and surround back speakers.
Full Mono
In this mode, all speakers output the same sound in
mono, so the sound you hear is the same regardless of
where you are within the listening room.
T-D (Theater-Dimensional)
With this mode you can enjoy a virtual 5.1 surround
sound even with only two or three speakers. This works
by controlling how sounds reach the listener’s left and
right ears. Good results may not be possible if there’s too
much reverb, so we recommend that you use this mode
in an environment with little or no natural reverb.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup
The onscreen setup menus appear on the connected TV and provide a convenient way
to change the AV receiver’s various settings. Settings are organized into eight catego-
ries on the main menu, most containing a submenu.
MENU
1. Input/Output Assign
2. Speaker Setup
3. Audio Adjust
4. Source Setup
5. Listening Mode Preset
6. Miscellaneous
7. Hardware Setup
8. Lock Setup
The onscreen menus shown in this manual may be
slightly different from what you see on your TV.
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
ENTER
RETURN
Menu Map
The following map shows how the setup menus are organized. Use the page numbers to locate information about items.
Main menu
Submenu
MENU
1. Input/Output Assign
2. Speaker Setup
3. Audio Adjust
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
4. Source Setup
5. Listening Mode Preset
6. Miscellaneous
7. Hardware Setup
8. Lock Setup
2. Speaker Setup
1. Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Config
3. Speaker Distance
4. Level Calibration
5. Equalizer Settings
6. THX Audio Setup
☞ page 115
6. Miscellaneous
1. Volume Setup
2. OSD Setup
☞ page 105
3. Audio Adjust
1. Tone Control
2. DSD
☞ page 117
3. Multiplex/Mono
4. PLIIx/Neo:6
5. Dolby EX
7. Hardware Setup
6. Theater-Dimensional
7. LFE Level
1. Remote Control
2. Zone2/Zone3
3. Tuner
4. Analog Multich
5. HDMI
6. Network
4. Source Setup
DVD
☞ page 119
1. IntelliVolume
2. A/V Sync
3. Name Edit
8. Lock Setup
Lock
4. Picture Adjust
5. Satellite Radio
6. SIRIUS Parental Lock
Unlocked
☞ page 114
5. Listening Mode Preset
1. DVD
2. VCR/DVR
3. CBL/SAT
4. GAME/TV
5. AUX1
6. AUX2
7. TAPE
8. TUNER
9. CD
10. PHONO
11. NET/USB
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitor Out Setup
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item, and then
press [ENTER].
3
4
This section explains items on the “Input/Output
Assign” menu.
The screen for that item appears.
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX2
6
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item, and use
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-
tons to change it.
+10
CLEAR
0
-- --- 10
11
12
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
The items are explained below.
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
DIMMER
2, 3
1, 5
2–4
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
SP
A
SP
B
5
NING MODE
DIRECT
THX ALL ST
PURE
A
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
2
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, zand
[ENTER] button.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gamma
Monitor Out
Adjust the balance of incoming picture R (red), G
(green), and B (blue) color data signal to the output color
data signal.
Resolution
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI out-
puts and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture res-
olution as necessary to match the resolution supported
by your TV.
Can be adjusted from –3 to +3 in steps of 1 (default is 0).
R Brightness
With this setting you can adjust the picture red bright-
ness.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
Through: Select this to pass video through the AV
receiver at the same resolution and with no
conversion (default).
Auto:
Select this to have the AV receiver automat-
ically convert video at resolutions not sup-
ported by your TV.
“–50” is the darkest.
“+50” is the brightest.
(Not available when the “Monitor Out” set-
ting is set to “Analog”.)
R Contrast
With this setting you can adjust red Contrast.
480p (480/576p):
Select this for 480p or 576p output and
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
video conversion as necessary.
720p:
Select this for 720p output and video con-
version as necessary.
Select this for 1080i output and video con-
version as necessary.
Select this for 1080p output and video con-
version as necessary.
“–50” is the least.
“+50” is the greatest.
1080i:
1080p:
G Brightness
With this setting you can adjust the picture green bright-
ness.
(Not available when the “Monitor Out” setting
is set to “Analog”.)
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
Source: Output will be according to the resolution level
which was set with Resolution inside Source:
4-4. Picture Adjust. (Setting for each Source
becomes possible.)
“–50” is the darkest.
“+50” is the brightest.
G Contrast
With this setting you can adjust green Contrast.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
Brightness
With this setting you can adjust the picture brightness.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
“–50” is the least.
“+50” is the greatest.
0).
“–50” is the darkest.
“+50” is the brightest.
B Brightness
With this setting you can adjust the picture blue bright-
ness.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
Contrast
With this setting you can adjust Contrast.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the darkest.
“+50” is the brightest.
“–50” is the least.
“+50” is the greatest.
B Contrast
With this setting you can adjust blue Contrast.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
Hue
With this setting you can adjust the red/green balance.
Can be adjusted from –20 to +20 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the least.
“+50” is the greatest.
“–20” is the strongest green.
“+20” is the strongest red.
Saturation
With this setting you can adjust saturation.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the weakest color.
“+50” is the strongest color.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker Setup
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then use the
remote controller’s [SP A] or
[SP B] button to select Speakers
A or Speakers B, respectively
(TX-NR906 only).
1
This section explains items on the “Speaker Setup”
menu.
Some of the speaker settings are set automatically by the
Automatic Speaker Setup function (see page 64).
-- --- 10
11
12
Note:
ZONE
2
1
2
• Speakers B cannot be selected if
“Speaker Type: Front(Speaker B)” is
set to “Not Use”.
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
DIMMER
• TX-SR876 continue with step 2 after
press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button.
2-4
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
Press the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
PREV
CH
2
3
1, 5
DISPLAY
MUTING
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
SP
A
SP
B
1*
LISTENING MODE
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. Speaker
*TX-NR906 only
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.
Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Setup
1. Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Config
3. Speaker Distance
4. Level Calibration
5. Equalizer Settings
6. THX Audio Setup
Speaker Configuration
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 64).
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
ENTER
RETURN
With the Speaker Configuration settings, you can specify
which speakers are connected and a crossover frequency,
distance, and level for each speaker.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. Speaker Con-
fig”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Speaker Config” screen appears.
4
You can choose which of the speakers you want to use
with the Speakers A and Speakers B configurations, and
set the crossover frequencies, distances, and levels of the
front Speakers A and front Speakers B independently.
The other speakers (i.e., subwoofer, center, surround,
and surround back) use the same crossover frequencies,
distances, and levels for Speakers A and Speakers B.
2–2. Speaker Config
Subwoofer
Front
Yes
Full Band
100Hz
100Hz
100Hz
2ch
Speaker A
Center
Surround
SurrBack
SurrBack Ch
LPF of LFE
DoubleBass
120Hz
On
The following crossover frequencies can be specified:
Full Band, 40 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz, 80 Hz (THX),
90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 130 Hz, 150 Hz, or
200 Hz.
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
VALUE
RETURN
Specify Full Band for speakers that can output low-fre-
quency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers
with a good sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify
a crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover fre-
quency will then be output by the subwoofer instead of
the speaker. Refer to your speakers’ manuals to deter-
mine the optimum crossover frequencies.
If you’re using THX-certified speakers, specify
80 Hz (THX) for all speakers.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Surround”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select a cross-
over frequency.
5
6
7
8
tons to select “Subwoofer”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
Yes: Select if a subwoofer is con-
nected.
If no surround left and right speakers
are connected, select “None”.
No: Select if no subwoofer is con-
nected.
Notes:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
Note:
The same setting is used for Speakers A
and Speakers B.
• Can be set if the currently selected
speakers (Speakers A or Speakers B)
is set to “BTL” (page 61).
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Front”, and then
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select a crossover fre-
quency.
• Cannot select “Full Band” if “Front”
(step 6) is set to anything other than
“Full Band”.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “SurrBack”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select a cross-
over frequency.
9
Notes:
• This setting can be set independently
for front Speakers A and front
Speakers B.
If no surround back speakers are con-
nected, select “None”.
• Fixed at “Full Band” if “Subwoofer”
(step 5) is set to “No”.
Notes:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Center”, and then
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select a crossover fre-
quency.
• Cannot be set if “Speaker Type:
Front(Speaker A) or Front(Speaker
B)” is set to “Bi-Amp” or “BTL”
(page 61), “Surround” is set to
“None” (step 8), or “Powered
If no center speaker is connected, select
None.
Zone2” is being used (page 132).
• Cannot select “Full Band” if “Sur-
round” (step 8) is set to anything
other than “Full Band”.
Notes:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
• Can be set if the currently selected
speakers (Speakers A or Speakers B)
is set to “BTL” (page 61).
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “SurrBack Ch”,
and then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
1ch: Select if one surround back
speaker is connected.
10
• Cannot select “Full Band” if “Front”
(step 6) is set to anything other than
“Full Band”.
• For Speakers B, if any channel is set
to “Full Band”, “Center” is fixed at
“Full Band”.
2ch: Select if two (left and right)
surround back speakers are
connected.
Notes:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
• Cannot be set if “Speaker Type:
Front(Speaker A) or Front(Speaker
B)” is set to “Bi-Amp” or “BTL”
(page 61), “SurrBack” is set to
Zone2” is being used (page 132).
Continue with step 11 on the next page.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel
Double Bass
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 64).
Speaker Setup function (see page 64).
With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency of
the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can be
used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only applies to
sources that use the LFE channel.
With this setting, you can boost bass output by feeding
front left and right channel bass sounds to the subwoofer.
This setting can only be made if the “Subwoofer” setting
in step 4 is set to “Yes”, and the “Front” setting in step 5
is set to “Full Band”.
*If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select
“80Hz(THX)”.
*If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select
“Off(THX)”.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
11
tons to select “LPF of LFE”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select a low-
pass filter frequency.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “DoubleBass”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
12
The following low-pass filter frequen-
cies can be selected: “80Hz(THX)”,
“90Hz”, “100Hz”, “110Hz”, or
“120Hz”.
Off(THX):
The subwoofer only outputs the
LFE channel.
On:
Note:
In addition to LFE channel sounds,
the subwoofer outputs front left and
right channel bass sounds.
The same setting is used for Speakers A
and Speakers B.
Note:
Continue with step 12 in the next col-
umn.
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
Continue with step 13 on the next page
(TX-NR906 only).
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Speakers A and Speakers B
(TX-NR906 only)
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Center”, and then
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select:
NotUse: Select if you don’t want to
use the center speaker with
15
16
These settings are not set automatically by the Auto-
If you’re using Speakers B, you can choose whether or
not to use the subwoofer, center, surround, and surround
back speakers with the Speakers A and Speakers B con-
figurations independently. You cannot choose whether
or not to use the front speakers.
Speakers A or Speakers B.
Use: Select if you do want to use
the center speaker with
Speakers A or Speakers B.
Note:
Use the remote controller’s [SP A] or [SP B] button to
select Speakers A or Speakers B, respectively.
Cannot be set if the “Center” (step 7) is
set to “None”.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Surround”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
NotUse: Select if you don’t want to
use the surround speakers
Press the Down [w] button to dis-
13
play the bottom half of the
“Speaker Config” screen.
2–2. Speaker Config
Subwoofer
Front
Not Use
Use
Not Use
Use
Use
Speaker A
with Speakers A or Speakers
B.
Center
Surround
SurrBack
Use: Select if you do want to use
the surround speakers with
Speakers A or Speakers B.
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
VALUE
RETURN
Note:
Notes:
Cannot be set if the “Center” (step 8) is
set to “None”.
• The bottom half of the “Speaker
Config” screen can only be displayed
when the “Speaker Type:
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “SurrBack”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
NotUse: Select if you don’t want to
use the surr back speakers
Front(Speaker B)” setting is set to
something other than “Not Use”
(page 61).
17
• You can switch between the Speak-
ers A and Speakers B settings on
either half of the “Speaker Config”
screen.
with Speakers A or Speakers
B.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Subwoofer”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
NotUse: Select if you don’t want to
use the subwoofer with
Use: Select if you do want to use
the surr back speakers with
Speakers A or Speakers B.
14
Note:
• Fixed at “Not Use” if “Surround”
(step 16) is set to “Not Use”.
Speakers A or Speakers B.
• Cannot be set if “Speaker Type:
Front(Speaker B)” is set to
“Bi-Amp” or “BTL” (page 61),
“SurrBack” is set to “None” (step 9),
or “Powered Zone2” is being used
Use: Select if you do want to use
the subwoofer with Speakers
A or Speakers B.
Note:
Cannot be set if “Subwoofer” (step 5) is
set to “No”.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
3
4
18
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. Speaker
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.
Speaker Distance
2. Speaker Setup
1. Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Config
3. Speaker Distance
4. Level Calibration
5. Equalizer Settings
6. THX Audio Setup
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 64).
With the “Speaker Distance” settings, you can specify
the distance from each speaker to the listening position.
You can set the distances for front Speakers A and front
Speakers B independently. The other speakers (i.e., sub-
woofer, center, surround, and surround back) use the
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
ENTER
RETURN
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “3. Speaker Dis-
tance”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Speaker Distance” screen
appears.
5
same distance settings for Speakers A and Speakers B.
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE2
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
2
DIMMER
4-8
2–3. Speaker Distance
+
Unit
feet
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
Left
CH
Speaker A
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
Center
Right
-
SurrRight
SurrBack R
SurrBack L
SurrLeft
Subwoofer
PREV
CH
3, 9
DISPLAY
MUTING
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
VALUE
RETURN
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
SP
A
SP
B
Note:
2*
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
Speakers that you set to “No” or
“None” in the Speaker Configuration
(page 95) cannot be selected.
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX ALL ST
PURE
A
*TX-NR906 only
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Unit”, and then
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select:
Measure and make a note of the
distance from each speaker to
the listening position.
6
1
2
feet: Select if you want to enter
distances in feet. Can be set
from 0.5 to 30 feet in 0.5-foot
steps.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then use the
remote controller’s [SP A] or
[SP B] button to select Speakers
A or Speakers B, respectively
(TX-NR906 only).
meters: Select if you want to enter
distances in meters. Can be
set from 0.15 to 9 meters in
0.15-meter steps.
Note:
• Speakers B cannot be selected if
“Speaker Type: Front(Speaker B)” is
set to “Not Use”.
• TX-SR876 continue with step 3 after
press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker Level Calibration
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
7
tons to select a speaker, and use
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-
tons to specify the distance.
Specify the distance from the speaker
to your listening position.
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 64).
With the “Level Calibration” settings, you can adjust the
level of each speaker while listening to the test tone so
that the volume of each speaker is the same at the listen-
ing position. You can adjust the levels of front Speakers
A and front Speakers B independently. The other speak-
ers (i.e., subwoofer, center, surround, and surround back)
use the same level settings for Speakers A and Speakers
B.
Notes:
• You can specify different distances
for front Speakers A and front
Speakers B, but not the other speak-
ers (i.e., subwoofer, center, surround,
and surround back).
• The “Center” distance cannot be set
if the “Center” is set to “None”
(page 95) or “Not Use” (page 98).
Notes:
• The speakers cannot be calibrated while the output of
the AV receiver is muted.
• The “SurrRight” and “SurrLeft” dis-
tances cannot be set if the “Sur-
round” is set to “None” (page 95) or
“Not Use” (page 98).
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX,
which is 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you nor-
mally listen at volume settings below this, be careful
because the test tone will be much louder.
• The “SurrBack R” and “SurrBack L”
distances cannot be set if “Speaker
Type: Front(Speaker A) or
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE2
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
Front(Speaker B)” is set to
DIMMER
“Bi-Amp” or “BTL” (page 61),
“SurrBack” is set to “None”
(page 95) or “Not Use” (page 98), or
“Powered Zone2” is being used
3-6
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
2, 7
DISPLAY
MUTING
• The “Subwoofer” distance cannot be
set if “Subwoofer” is set to “No”
(page 96).
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
SP
A
SP
B
Repeat step 7 for each speaker.
1*
LISTENING MODE
SURR
8
9
STEREO
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX ALL ST
PURE
A
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
*TX-NR906 only
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then use the
remote controller’s [SP A] or
[SP B] button to select Speakers
A or Speakers B, respectively
(TX-NR906 only).
1
2
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
Notes:
• Speakers B cannot be selected if
“Speaker Type: Front(Speaker B)” is
set to “Not Use”.
• TX-SR876 continue with step 2 after
press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button.
Press the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select a speaker, and use
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-
tons to adjust the level.
3
5
tons to select “2. Speaker
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.
Levels can be adjusted from –12 to
+12 dB in 0.5 dB steps (–15 to +12 dB
for the subwoofer).
2. Speaker Setup
1. Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Config
3. Speaker Distance
4. Level Calibration
5. Equalizer Settings
6. THX Audio Setup
Notes:
• You can set different levels for front
Speakers A and front Speakers B, but
not the other speakers (i.e., sub-
woofer, center, surround, and surr
back).
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
ENTER
RETURN
• The “Center” level cannot be set if
the “Center” is set to “None”
(page 95) or “Not Use” (page 98).
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “4. Level Calibra-
tion”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Level Calibration” screen appears
and the pink noise test tone is output by
the front left speaker.
4
• The “SurrRight” and “SurrLeft” lev-
els cannot be set if the “Surround” is
set to “None” (page 95) or “Not Use”
(page 98).
• The “SurrBack R” and “SurrBack L”
levels cannot be set if “Speaker Type:
Front(Speaker A) or Front(Speaker
B)” is set to “Bi-Amp” or “BTL”
(page 61), “SurrBack” is set to
“None” (page 95) or “Not Use”
(page 98), or “Powered Zone2” is
being used (page 132).
2–4. Level Calibration
Left
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-15.0dB
Center
Speaker A
Right
SurrRight
SurrBack R
SurrBack L
SurrLeft
Subwoofer
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
VALUE
RETURN
• The “Subwoofer” levels cannot be
set if “Subwoofer” is set to “No”
(page 96).
Note:
Levels cannot be adjusted for speakers
set to “No” or “None” in the Speaker
Configuration (page 95).
Repeat step 5 until the volume of
the test tone from each speaker
is the same.
6
If you’re using a handheld sound level
meter, adjust the level of each speaker
so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listen-
ing position, measured with C-weight-
ing and slow reading.
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
7
Notes:
• Speaker levels can also be adjusted by using the dedi-
cated buttons on the remote controller. Press the
[TEST TONE] button to output the test tone. Use the
[CH SEL] button to select each speaker, and use the
[LEVEL–] and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust the level.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Equalizer Settings
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to set the “Equalizer”
option to:
4
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 64).
Off: Equalizer off, flat response.
With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of
speakers individually with a 7-band equalizer. The vol-
izer settings only apply to Speakers A and cannot be
adjusted while Speakers B is selected.
Manual: The equalizer for each
speaker can be set manually.
*1
REMOTE MODE
MultEQ XT
DVD
VCR
CD
ZONE2
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
DIMMER
*1
Dynamic EQ
2-7
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
*1
Dynamic Vol(Light)
-
PREV
CH
1, 8
DISPLAY
MUTING
*1
Dynamic Vol(Heavy)
*1 These setting can be selected after having
performed the Automatic Speaker Setup.
As soon as the Automatic Speaker Setup is
complete, it will automatically be set to
Dynamic EQ™.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
2
When “Dynamic EQ” is selected,
The main menu appears onscreen.
®
“MultEQ XT” and “Dynamic EQ”
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
become available.
When “Dynamic Vol(Light)” or
“Dynamic Vol(Heavy)” is selected,
“MultEQ XT”, “Dynamic EQ”, and
™
“Dynamic Volume ” become avail-
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. Speaker
able.
If you selected “Manual”, continue
with the next step. If you selected “Off”
go to step 8.
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.
2. Speaker Setup
1. Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Config
3. Speaker Distance
4. Level Calibration
5. Equalizer Settings
6. THX Audio Setup
■ MultEQ XT
■ Dynamic EQ
“Audyssey MultEQ XT” and “Dynamic EQ” becomes
active (see page 64).
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
ENTER
RETURN
■ Dynamic Vol(Light)
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “5. Equalizer Set-
tings”, and then press [ENTER].
“Audyssey MultEQ XT”, “Dynamic EQ”, and
“Dynamic Volume (Light Compression Mode)”
becomes active (see page 64).
3
The “Equalizer Settings” screen
appears.
This setting prevents loud and soft sounds from being
much louder and softer respectively than average
sounds.
2–5. Equalizer Settings
Equalizer
Channel
63Hz
Manual
Front
0dB
■ Dynamic Vol(Heavy)
160Hz
0dB
“Audyssey MultEQ XT”, “Dynamic EQ”, and
“Dynamic Volume (Heavy Compression Mode)”
becomes active.
400Hz
0dB
1000Hz
2500Hz
6300Hz
16000Hz
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
This setting affects volume the most, causing all sounds
to be of equal loudness.
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
VALUE
RETURN
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The Equalizer settings have no effect on 176.4/
192 kHz input signals.
Use the Down [w] button to select
5
“Channel”, and then use the Left
and Right [e]/[r] buttons to
select a speaker.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
You can select: “Front”, “Center”,
“Surround”, “SurrBack”, or “Sub-
woofer”.
2–5. Equalizer Settings
Equalizer
Channel
63Hz
Manual
Front
0dB
160Hz
0dB
400Hz
0dB
1000Hz
2500Hz
6300Hz
16000Hz
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
VALUE
RETURN
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select a frequency, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to adjust the
level at that frequency.
6
You can select: “63Hz”, “160Hz”,
“400Hz”, “1000Hz”, “2500Hz”,
“6300Hz”, or “16000Hz”. And for the
subwoofer, “25Hz”, “40Hz”, “63Hz”,
“100Hz”, or “160Hz”.
The volume at each frequency can be
adjusted from –6 to +6 dB in 1 dB
steps.
Tip:
Low frequencies (e.g., 160Hz) affect
bass sounds; high frequencies (e.g.,
6300Hz) affect treble sounds.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Channel”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select another
speaker.
7
Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each speaker.
Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
8
Notes:
• When the listening mode is set to Direct or Pure
Audio, no effect will be produced.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THX Audio Setup
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “SurrBack Sp
Spacing”, and use the Left and
Right [e]/[r] buttons to specify
the distance between your sur-
round back speakers:
> 4ft (>1.2m) (Default): Select this if
your surround back speakers are more
than 4 feet (1.2 m) apart.
4
These settings are not set automatically by the Auto-
With the “SurrBack Sp Spacing” setting, you can specify
the distance between your surround back speakers. This
setting is used by Speakers A and Speakers B.
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set the “THX
Subwoofer” setting to “Yes”. You can then apply THX’s
Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC) to compensate the
perceived exaggeration of low frequencies for listeners
sitting very close to a room boundary (i.e., wall).
< 1ft (< 0.3m): Select this if your sur-
round back speakers are between 0 and
1 foot (0–30 cm) apart.
You can also set the THX Loudness Plus feature “On” or
“Off”. When the “Loudness Plus” is set to “On”, it is
possible to enjoy even subtle nuances of audio expres-
sion at low volume.
1ft– 4ft (0.3m–1.2m): Select this if
your surround back speakers are
between 1 and 4 feet (0.3–1.2 m) apart.
This result is only available when the THX listening
mode is selected.
Note:
Cannot be set if “SurrBack Ch” is set to
Front(Speaker A) or Front(Speaker B)”
is set to “Bi-Amp” or “BTL” (page 61),
or “Not Use” (page 98), or “Powered
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “THX Subwoofer”,
and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
No: Select this if you do not have
a THX-certified subwoofer.
5
6
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
2
tons to select “2. Speaker
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.
Yes: Select this if you have a THX-
certified subwoofer.
2. Speaker Setup
1. Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Config
3. Speaker Distance
4. Level Calibration
5. Equalizer Settings
6. THX Audio Setup
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “BGC”, and use
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-
tons to select:
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
ENTER
RETURN
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “6. THX Audio
3
Off: Select this to turn off BGC.
On: Select this to turn on BGC.
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “THX Audio Setup” screen appears.
Note:
This setting is only available if “THX
Subwoofer” is set to “Yes” (step 5).
2–6. THX Audio Setup
SurrBack Sp Spacing
THX Subwoofer
BGC
Loudness Plus
Preserve THX Settings
> 4ft
Yes
Off
On
- - -
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
VALUE
RETURN
When “Loudness Plus” is set to “Off”,
the “Preserve THX settings” can be
selected.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
Audio Adjust
7
tons to select “Loudness Plus”,
and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
Off: Select this to turn off Loud-
ness Plus.
Here you can set listening mode-related settings and
functions.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
On: Select this to turn on Loud-
ness Plus (default).
The main menu appears onscreen.
When “Loudness Plus” is set to “Off”,
the “Preserve THX settings” selection
will appear under “Loudness Plus”
(Step 8).
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Preserve THX set-
tings”, and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
8
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
2
tons to select “3. Audio Adjust”,
and then press [ENTER].
Yes: When Yes is selected,
Audyssey Dynamic EQ™ /
Audyssey Dynamic Volume
™ will not be active.
The “Audio Adjust” menu appears.
3. Audio Adjust
1. Tone Control
2. DSD
3. Multiplex/Mono
4. PLIIx/Neo:6
5. Dolby EX
6. Theater-Dimensional
7. LFE Level
No: When No is selected,
Audyssey Dynamic EQ /
Audyssey Dynamic Volume
will be active in THX listen-
ing mode depending on the
setting.
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
ENTER
RETURN
Note:
This setting is only available if “Loud-
ness Plus” is set to “Off” (step 7).
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item, and then
press [ENTER].
The function menu you selected
appears.
3
4
Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
9
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select the settings, and
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to set them.
THX Loudness Plus
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control tech-
nology featured in THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX
Select2 Plus™ Certified receivers. With THX Loud-
ness Plus, home theater audiences can now experi-
ence the rich details in a surround mix at any volume
level. A consequence of turning the volume below
Reference Level is that certain sound elements can
be lost or perceived differently by the listener. THX
Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and spatial
shifts that occur when the volume is reduced by
intelligently adjusting ambient surround channel
levels and frequency response. This enables users to
experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless
of the volume setting. THX Loudness Plus is auto-
matically applied when listening in any THX listen-
ing mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and
THX Games modes are tailored to apply the proper
THX Loudness Plus settings for each type of con-
tent.
The settings are explained below.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiplex/Mono Settings
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
5
Multiplex
The setup menu closes.
■ Input Ch(Mux)
This setting determines which channel of a stereo multi-
plex source is output. Use it to select audio channels or
languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV
broadcasts, and so on.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
Main: The main channel is output (default).
Sub: The sub channel is output.
Main/Sub: Both the main and sub channels are output.
Tone Control Settings
Mono
You can adjust the tone (bass and treble) of the front,
center, surround, and surr back speakers individually.
For the subwoofer, you can adjust the bass.
■ Input Ch(Mono)
This setting specifies the channel to be used for playing
any 2-channel digital source such as Dolby Digital, or
2-channel analog/PCM source in the Mono listening
mode.
L+R: Both the left and right channels are output
(default).
■ Bass
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds from –10 dB
to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
■ Treble
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds from
–10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
L: Only the left channel is output.
R: Only the right channel is output.
Notes:
■ Output Speaker
This setting determines which speakers output mono
audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.
• The tone control circuits are bypassed when the
Direct, Pure Audio or THX listening mode is selected.
• This setting is not available when the multichannel
Analog input is selected.
C: Mono audio is output by the center speaker
(default).
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [TONE], [e], and [r] buttons
L/R: Mono audio is output by the front left and right
speakers.
DSD Setting
PLIIx/Neo:6 Settings
■ DAC Direct
PLIIx Music(2ch Input)
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.
This setting determines whether or not DSD (SACD)
audio signals are passed through the DSP for A/V Sync,
delay, etc., processing when the Pure Audio or Direct lis-
tening mode is selected.
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these
settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro
Logic IIx.
No: DSD signals are processed by the DSP
(default).
Yes: DSD signals are not processed by the DSP.
■ Panorama
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front
stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode.
On: Panorama function on.
Off: Panorama function off (default).
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Dimension
Theater-Dimensional (T–D) Setting
With this setting, you can move the sound field forward
or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode. It can be adjusted from –3 to +3. The
default value is 0. Lower settings move the sound field
forward. Higher settings move it backward.
■ Listening Angle
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-Dimen-
sional listening mode by specifying the angle of the front
left and right speakers relative to the listening position.
Ideally, the front left and right speakers should be equi-
distant from the listening position and at an angle close
to one of the two available settings.
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much
surround sound, move the sound field forward to
improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image
feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround
sound, move it backward.
Front left speaker
Front right speaker
■ Center Width
30˚
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound
from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re using a
center speaker, the center channel sound is output by
only the center speaker. (If you’re not using a center
speaker, the center channel sound will be distributed to
the front left and right speakers to create a phantom cen-
ter). This setting controls the front left, right, and center
mix, allowing you to adjust the weight of the center
channel sound. It can be adjusted from 0 to 7. The default
value is 3.
Wide: Select if the angle is greater than 30 degrees
(default).
Narrow:Select if the angle is less than 30 degrees.
LFE Level Settings
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE
(Low Frequency Effects) channel individually for Dolby
Digital, DTS, and multichannel PCM sources. The level
can be set to –∞, –20 dB, –10 dB, or 0 dB (default).
Neo:6 Music
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud when
using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB
or –∞ dB.
■ Center Image
The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel
surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With this
setting, you can specify by how much the front left and
right channel output is attenuated in order to create the
center channel. It can be adjusted from 0 to 5. The
default value is 2.
■ Dolby Digital
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital and
Dolby Digital Plus sources.
■ DTS
When set to 0, the front left and right channel output is
attenuated by half (–6 dB), giving the impression that the
sound is located centrally. This setting works well when
the listening position is considerably off center. When
set to 5, the front left and right channels are not attenu-
ated, maintaining the original stereo balance.
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS and DTS-HD
High Resolution sources.
■ Multich PCM
Sets the level of the LFE channel for multichannel PCM
sources. (Multichannel PCM is input via HDMI.)
■ Dolby TrueHD
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby TrueHD
sources.
Dolby EX Settings
■ Dolby EX
This setting determines how Dolby EX signals are han-
dled.
■ DTS-HD Master Audio
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS-HD Master
Audio sources.
Auto: When the source is Dolby EX, you can select
the Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening
mode (default).
■ DSD
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DSD sources.
Manual:When the source is Dolby EX, you can select
any of the listening modes compatible with this
format (e.g., Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx,
etc.).
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to change the setting.
Repeat this step for the other settings.
3
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
CLEAR
12
0
-- --- 10
11
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
Music Optimizer
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
Optimizer
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound qual-
ity of compressed music files. Use it with music files that
use “lossy” compression, such as MP3.
DIMMER
+
ENTER
SETUP
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
Off: Music Optimizer off (default).
On: Music Optimizer on.
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
Note:
The Music Optimizer function only works with PCM
digital audio input signals with a sampling rate below
48 kHz and analog audio input signals. The Music Opti-
mizer is disabled when the Pure Audio or Direct listen-
ing mode is selected.
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
SP
A
SP
B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
DIRECT
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
Using the Re-EQ Function
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
Re-EQ
DVD
With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a
soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh,
making it more suitable for home theater viewing.
L NIGHT
RC-687
M
]
This function can be used with the following listening
modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro
Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, DTS, DTS-
ES, DTS Neo:6 Cinema, DTS 96/24, THX Cinema,
THX Surround EX, THX Ultra2 Cinema, Neural THX,
and Multichannel.
Adjust Using the Direct Button
You can change various audio settings by pressing the
[DIRECT] button.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
1
MODE button , press and hold
down the [DIRECT] button.
Remote
controller
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[Re-EQ] button.
The setting item appears on the display.
Press the [Re-EQ] button again to turn
off the Re-EQ function.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
2
tons to select an item.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Late Night Function
Source Setup
With the Late Night function, you can reduce the
dynamic range of Dolby Digital material so that you can
still hear quiet parts even when listening at low volume
levels—ideal for watching movies late at night when you
don’t want to disturb anyone.
This section explains items on the “Source Setup” menu.
Items can be set individually for each input selector.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
1
MODE button, and then use the
input selector buttons to select
an input source.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then press the
[L NIGHT] button repeatedly.
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital
Plus sources, the options are:
Off: Late Night function off
(default).
Low: Small reduction in dynamic
range.
High: Large reduction in dynamic
Press the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
2
range.
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options
are:
Auto: The dynamic range is con-
trolled automatically based
on the source material and the
current volume setting
(default).
Off: Late Night function off.
On: Late Night function on.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
3
tons to select “4. Source Setup”,
and then press [ENTER].
The “Source Setup” menu appears. The
name of the currently selected input
selector is displayed in a box.
Notes:
4. Source Setup
DVD
1. IntelliVolume
2. A/V Sync
3. Name Edit
4. Picture Adjust
5. Satellite Radio
6. SIRIUS Parental Lock
• The Late Night function can be used only when the
input source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or
Dolby TrueHD.
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the
material that you are playing and the intention of the
original sound designer, and with some material there
will be little or no effect when you select the different
options.
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
ENTER
RETURN
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item, and then
press [ENTER].
4
• The Late Night function is set to “Off” when the AV
receiver is set to Standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources,
it will be set to “Auto”.
The screen for that item appears.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Name Edit
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
5
You can enter a custom name for each individual input
selector and radio preset for easy identification. When
entered, the custom name will appear on the display.
The custom name is edited using the character input
screen.
tons to select an option, and use
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-
tons to change it.
The “Source Setup” menu items are
explained below.
1. Use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to select a
character, and then press [ENTER].
Repeat this step to enter up to 10 characters.
2. When you’ve finished, to store a name, be sure to
use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to select
“OK”, and then press [ENTER]. Otherwise it will
not be saved.
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
6
Name input area
4-3. Name Edit
Name
4-3. Name Edit
Name
A
N
a
B
O
b
C
P
c
D
Q
d
E
R
e
r
F
S
f
G
T
g
t
H
U
h
u
I
V
i
J
W
j
K
X
k
L
Y
l
M
Z
0
(
1
)
2
+
3
*
4
=
5
/
6
,
7
:
8
;
9
!
-
.
'
?
_
m
z
OK CANCEL
n
o
p
q
s
v
w
x
y
IntelliVolume
DISPLAY
ENTER
INPUT
RETURN
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
DISPLAY
ENTER
INPUT
RETURN
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each
input selector individually. This is useful if one of your
source components is louder or quieter than the others.
(Left)/ (Right):
Selected when the cursor is moved within
the Name input area.
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to set the level.
If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use
the Left [e] button to reduce its input level. If it’s notice-
ably quieter, use the Right [r] button to increase its
input level. The input level can be adjusted from –12 dB
to +12 dB in 1 dB steps.
OK:
Selects when the entry is complete.
CANCEL:
Selects when you want to cancel the name
entry.
Note:
IntelliVolume does not apply for Zone 2 or Zone 3.
A/V Sync
To correct a character:
1. Use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to select
”(Left) or “ ”(Right) and then press [ENTER].
2. Press [ENTER] several times to select the incorrect
character (The cursor moves one letter each time
[ENTER] is pressed).
When using your DVD player’s progressive scanning
function, you may find that the picture and sound are out
of sync. With the “A/V Sync” setting, you can correct this
by applying a delay to the audio signal. The delay can be
set from 0 to 250 milliseconds (msec) in 5 millisecond
steps.
“
3. Use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to select the
Use the Up and Down
4–2. A/V Sync
correct character, and then press [ENTER].
[q]/[w] buttons to
DVD
A/V Sync
100msec
select an input selector,
and use the Left and
Right [e]/[r] buttons
to set the delay.
Notes:
• To name a radio preset, use the [TUNER] button to
select AM or FM, and then select the preset (see step
Press Enter to see picture.
To view the TV picture
while setting the delay,
press [ENTER].
• You cannot enter a custom name for XM or SIRIUS
radio presets.
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
VALUE
RETURN
• To restore a custom name to the default, erase the cus-
tom name by entering an empty white space for each
letter.
or display supports HDMI Lip Sync, the displayed delay
time will be the A/V Sync delay time. The HDMI Lip
Sync delay time is displayed underneath in parentheses.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
Note:
A/V Sync cannot be set when the Pure Audio listening
mode is selected, or when the Direct listening mode is
used with an analog input source.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zoom:
Picture Adjust
The new “4-4. Picture Adjust” item has been added to
the “1. Input/Output Assign” menu. This menu and its
settings can be accessed just like the other menus. The
settings are explained below.
■ Game Mode
If video signal delay occurs during play on a video com-
ponent, such as a Game console, connected to the AV
receiver, select “Game Mode” on the input selector con-
nected to the component and set it to “On”.
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to select:
Off: Game Mode off (default).
On: Game Mode on.
WideZoom:
■ Zoom Mode
This setting determines the aspect ratio.
Normal:
Note:
The “Zoom Mode” can also be set using the [DISPLAY]
button on the remote controller.
1. Press and hold the [DISPLAY] button until the set-
Full: (default)
ting item appears on the display.
2. Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select
“Zoom Mode”, and use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to change the setting.
■ ISF Mode
The receiver has been designed to incorporate setup and
calibration standards established by the Imaging Science
Foundation (ISF). The ISF has developed carefully
crafted, industry-recognized standards for optimal video
performance and has implemented a training program
for technicians and installers to use these standards to
obtain optimal picture quality from the receiver. Accord-
ingly, Onkyo recommends that setup and calibration be
performed by an ISF Certified installation technician.
Custom: User setting (All items can be freely set.)
Day:
Setting when a room is bright.
Night: Setting when a room is dark.
Note:
When “ISF Mode” is selected, the setting from “Resolu-
tion” to “B Contrast” is changed.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resolution
Picture Mode
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI out-
puts and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture res-
olution as necessary to match the resolution supported
by your TV.
Available only when Source has been selected under the
“1-1. Monitor Out” setting.
DVD-Video disc content originates from either film
(recorded at 24 frames per second) or video intended for
TV (recorded at 30 frames per second). With the default
Picture Mode setting of Auto, the AV receiver automati-
cally detects the type of content and processes it accord-
ingly to achieve the best picture quality. If the AV
receiver detects the type of content incorrectly due to
characteristics of the disc, you can select Video or Film
manually.
Through: Select this to pass video through the AV
receiver at the same resolution and with no
conversion (default).
Auto:
Select this to have the AV receiver automat-
ically convert video at resolutions not sup-
ported by your TV.
Auto: The type of content is detected automati-
cally and processed accordingly (default).
Video: Select when playing a DVD-Video disc
whose content originates from video.
When the “Monitor Out” is set to “Analog”,
it will operate as “Through”.
480p (480/576p):
Film: Select when playing a DVD-Video disc
whose content originates from film.
Select this for 480p or 576p output and
video conversion as necessary.
Edge Enhancement
With Edge Enhancement, you can make the picture
appear sharper.
Off: Edge enhancement off (default).
Low: Low edge enhancement.
Medium: Medium edge enhancement.
High: High edge enhancement.
720p:
Select this for 720p output and video con-
version as necessary.
1080i:
1080p:
Select this for 1080i output and video con-
version as necessary.
Select this for 1080p output and video con-
version as necessary.
When the “Monitor Out” is set to “Analog”,
it will operate as “1080i”.
Source: Output will be according to the resolution level
which was set with Resolution inside Source:
4-4. Picture Adjust. (Setting for each Source
becomes possible.)
Mosquito NR
With Mosquito Noise Reduction, you can remove the
shimmering or haziness that sometimes appears around
objects in the picture. Mosquito noise can be an issue
with overly compressed MPEG content.
Off: Mosquito noise reduction off (default).
Low: Low mosquito noise reduction.
Brightness
With this setting you can adjust the picture brightness.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
Medium: Medium mosquito noise reduction.
High: High mosquito noise reduction.
“–50” is the darkest.
“+50” is the brightest.
Random NR
Contrast
With Random Noise Reduction, you can remove indis-
criminate picture noise, such as film grain.
Off: Random noise reduction off (default).
Low: Low random noise reduction.
Medium: Medium random noise reduction.
High: High random noise reduction.
With this setting you can adjust Contrast.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the least.
“+50” is the greatest.
Hue
Block NR
With this setting you can adjust the red/green balance.
Can be adjusted from –20 to +20 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
With Block Noise Reduction, you can remove the block
distortion that sometimes appears in the picture. Block
noise can be an issue with overly compressed MPEG
content.
“–20” is the strongest green.
“+20” is the strongest red.
Off: Block noise reduction off (default).
On: Block noise reduction on.
Saturation
With this setting you can adjust saturation.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
Gamma
Adjust the balance of incoming picture R (red), G
(green), and B (blue) color data signal to the output color
data signal.
“–50” is the weakest color.
“+50” is the strongest color.
Can be adjusted from –3 to +3 in steps of 1 (default is 0).
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R Brightness:
With this setting you can adjust the picture red bright-
ness.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the darkest.
“+50” is the brightest.
R Contrast:
With this setting you can adjust red Contrast.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the least.
“+50” is the greatest.
G Brightness:
With this setting you can adjust the picture green bright-
ness.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the darkest.
“+50” is the brightest.
G Contrast:
With this setting you can adjust green Contrast.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the least.
“+50” is the greatest.
B Brightness:
With this setting you can adjust the picture blue bright-
ness.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the darkest.
“+50” is the brightest.
B Contrast:
With this setting you can adjust blue Contrast.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the least.
“+50” is the greatest.
Satellite Radio
This item is for use with satellite radio. It’s not available
separate Satellite Radio Guide for more information.
SIRIUS Parental Lock
This item is for use with SIRIUS Satellite Radio. It’s not
available if “Satellite Radio” is set to None or XM (see
page 118). See the separate Satellite Radio Guide for
more information.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening Mode Presets
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an audio format,
and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select a listen-
ing mode.
Only listening modes compatible with
the audio format can be selected (see
page 82).
4
On the “Listening Mode Preset” menu, you can specify
a default listening mode for each of the audio formats
supported by each input selector. The AV receiver will
then select the listening mode automatically depending
on the format of the input signal. You can still select the
other listening modes, although the default listening
mode will be used the next time you turn on the AV
receiver.
Analog/PCM: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for analog and PCM
sources.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
Dolby Digital: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for Dolby Digital and
Dolby Digital plus sources.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
DTS: Specifies the default listening
mode for DTS and DTS-HD High Res-
olution sources.
D.F. 2ch: Specifies the default listening
mode for 2-channel (2/0) stereo sources
in a digital format, such as Dolby Digi-
tal or DTS.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
2
tons to select “5. Listening Mode
Preset”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Listening Mode Preset” menu
appears.
D.F. Mono: Specifies the default listen-
ing mode for mono sources in a digital
format, such as Dolby Digital or DTS.
Multich PCM: Specifies the default
listening mode for multichannel PCM
sources, such as DVD-Audio.
5. Listening Mode Preset
1. DVD
2. VCR/DVR
3. CBL/SAT
4. GAME/TV
5. AUX1
6. AUX2
7. TAPE
8. TUNER
9. CD
10. PHONO
192k/176.4k: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for high resolution
192 kHz and 176.4 kHz digital sources,
such as DVD-Audio. (input via HDMI)
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
ENTER
RETURN
Dolby TrueHD: Specifies the default
listening mode for Dolby TrueHD
sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD
(input via HDMI).
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an input selector,
and then press [ENTER].
3
The audio formats supported by that
input selector appear.
DTS-HD Master Audio: Specifies the
default listening mode for DTS-HD
Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray
or HD DVD (input via HDMI).
5–x. Listening Mode Preset
DVD
Analog/PCM
Dolby Digital
DTS
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
DSD: Specifies the default listening
mode for DSD multichannel sources,
such as SACD (input via HDMI).
D.F. 2ch
D.F. Mono
If the input selector is assigned to an
HDMI IN, use the Down [w] button to
select the audio formats shown on the
following screen.
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
5–x. Listening Mode Preset
DVD
Multich PCM
192k/176.4k
Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD Master Audio
DSD
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
For the “TUNER” input selector, “Ana-
log” is the only format available.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Miscellaneous Setup
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item, and use
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-
tons to change it.
4
This section explains items on the “Miscellaneous”
menu.
The items are explained below.
M
ZONE
2
1
2
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1
DIMMER
2-4
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
1, 5
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
DISPLAY
MUTING
5
Setup closes.
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
SP
A
SP
B
1*
LISTENING MODE
DIRECT
THX ALL ST
PURE
A
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
2
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Volume Setup
■ Volume Display
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level
is displayed.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “6. Miscella-
neous”, and then press [ENTER].
Absolute: Display range is “Min”, 0.5 through 99.5,
“Max”.
Relative: Display range is –∞ dB, –81.5 dB through
The “Miscellaneous” menu appears.
+18.0 dB.
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value
0 dB.
6. Miscellaneous
1. Volume Setup
2. OSD Setup
■ Muting Level
This setting determines how much the output is muted
set to –∞ dB (fully muted) or from –50 dB to –10 dB in
10 dB steps.
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
ENTER
RETURN
■ Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item, and then
press [ENTER].
3
When the “Volume Display” setting is set to “Absolute”,
the “Maximum Volume” range is “Off”, 99 to 50. When
it’s set to “Relative”, the range is “Off”, +17 dB to
–32 dB. To disable this setting, select “Off”.
The screen for that item appears.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be each
OSD Setup
time the AV receiver is turned on.
■ Immediate Display
This setting determines whether operation details are
displayed onscreen immediately after an AV receiver
function is used.
When the “Volume Display” preference is set to “Abso-
lute”, the range is “Last”, “Min”, 1 to “Max”. When it’s
set to “Relative”, the range is “Last”, –∞ dB, –81 dB to
+18 dB.
On: Displayed (default).
Off: Not displayed.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select “Last”.
Even when “On” is selected, operation details may not
be output if the input source is connected to a COMPO-
NENT VIDEO IN or HDMI IN.
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that
“Immediate Display” be turned off.
Note:
The “Power On Volume” setting cannot be set higher
than the “Maximum Volume” setting.
■ Headphone Level
■ Monitor Type
With this setting, you can specify the aspect ratio of your
TV so that menus are displayed properly.
With this setting, you can offset the headphone volume
relative to the main volume. This is useful if your head-
phones are too loud or too quiet at the volume setting you
usually use when listening through your speakers. The
headphone level can be set from –12 dB to +12 dB.
4:3: Select if your TV is 4:3.
16:9: Select if your TV is 16:9 (default).
■ Zone2 Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
Zone 2.
■ Display Position
This setting determines where on the screen operation
details are displayed.
When the “Volume Display” setting is set to “Absolute”,
the “Maximum Volume” range is “Off”, 99 to 50. When
it’s set to “Relative”, the range is “Off”, +17 dB to
–32 dB. To disable this setting, select “Off”.
Bottom: Bottom of the screen (default).
Top: Top of the screen.
■ TV Format (not North American models)
■ Zone2 Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be for
Zone 2 each time the AV receiver is turned on.
■ Language
This setting determines the language used for the
onscreen setup menus. You can select: English, German,
French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, or Japanese.
When the “Volume Display” preference is set to “Abso-
lute”, the range is “Last”, “Min”, 1 to “Max”. When it’s
set to “Relative”, the range is “Last”, –∞ dB, –81 dB to
+18 dB.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select “Last”.
■ Zone3 Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
Zone 3.
When the “Volume Display” setting is set to “Absolute”,
the “Maximum Volume” range is “Off”, 99 to 50. When
it’s set to “Relative”, the range is “Off”, +17 dB to
–32 dB. To disable this setting, select “Off”.
■ Zone3 Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be for
Zone 3 each time the AV receiver is turned on.
When the “Volume Display” preference is set to “Abso-
lute”, the range is “Last”, “Min”, 1 to “Max”. When it’s
set to “Relative”, the range is “Last”, –∞ dB, –81 dB to
+18 dB.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select “Last”.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hardware Setup
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item, and use
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-
tons to change it.
4
This section explains items on the Hardware menu.
Remote
indicator
The items are explained below.
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
INPUT
Number
buttons
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
5
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Setup closes.
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
CLEAR
12
0
-- --- 10
11
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
Note:
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
+
ENTER
SETUP
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
Remote Control
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
■ Remote ID
When several Onkyo components are used in the same
room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To differenti-
ate the AV receiver from the other components, you can
change its remote ID from 1, the default, to 2 or 3.
YLIST
RANDOM
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
Note:
If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure to
change the remote controller to the same ID (see below),
otherwise, you won’t be able to control it with the remote
controller.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Changing the Remote Controller’s ID
While holding down the
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
1
2
3
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-
ton, press the TV [INPUT] button.
The Remote indicator flashes four
times.
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
7. Hardware Setup
1. Remote Control
2. Zone2/Zone3
3. Tuner
4. Analog Multich
5. HDMI
6. Network
Use the number buttons to enter
ID 1, 2, or 3.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
2
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
ENTER
RETURN
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item, and then
press [ENTER].
The screen for that item appears.
Zone2/Zone3
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Lip Sync
Tuner
The Lip Sync function can automatically synchronize
HDMI audio and video that’s gotten out of sync due to
the complex digital video processing being performed by
your HDMI-compatible TV. With HDMI Lip Sync, the
audio delay required to synchronize the audio and video
is calculated and applied automatically by the AV
receiver.
■ AM Freq Step (on some models)
■ Satellite Radio (on North American model)
If you connect an XM Satellite Radio antenna or SIRIUS
Satellite Radio antenna to the AV receiver (both sold
separately), set this setting to XM or SIRIUS respec-
tively. If you connect both types of antenna, select
XM/SIRIUS. Otherwise, select None. See the separate
Satellite Radio Guide for more information.
Disable: HDMI lip sync disabled (default).
Enable: HDMI lip sync enabled.
Notes:
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible
TV supports HDMI Lip Sync.
• You can check the amount of delay being applied by
the HDMI Lip Sync function on the “A/V Sync”
screen (see page 110).
Analog Multich
■ Subwoofer Input Sensitivity
Some DVD players output the LFE channel from their
analog subwoofer output at 15 dB higher than normal.
With this setting, you can change the AV receiver’s sub-
woofer sensitivity to match your DVD player. Note that
this setting only affects signals connected to the AV
receiver’s MULTI CH: SUBWOOFER jack.
■ x.v.Color
If your HDMI source and HDMI-compatible TV both
support the “x.v.Color”, you can enable “x.v.Color” on
the AV receiver with this setting.
Disable: “x.v.Color” disabled (default).
Enable: “x.v.Color” enabled.
You can select 0 dB, 5 dB, 10 dB, or 15 dB.
Notes:
If you find that your subwoofer is too loud, try the 10 dB
or 15 dB setting.
• If the color is unnatural when “x.v.Color” is set to
“Enable”, change the setting to “Disable”.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction man-
ual for details.
HDMI
■ Control
■ Audio TV Out
This function allows
connected via HDMI to be controlled with the AV
receiver.
-compatible components
This setting determines whether audio received by an
HDMI input is output by the HDMI outputs. You may
want to change this setting to “On” if your TV is con-
nected to an HDMI output and you want to listen to
audio from an HDMI component through your TV’s
speakers. Normally, it should be set to “Off”.
Disable:
Enable:
Notes:
disabled (default).
enabled.
Off: HDMI audio is not output (default).
On: HDMI audio is output.
•
, which stands for Remote Interactive over
HDMI, is the name of the system control function
found on Onkyo components. The AV receiver can be
used with CEC (Consumer Electronics Control),
which allows system control over HDMI and is part of
the HDMI standard. CEC provides interoperability
between various components, however, operation with
Notes:
• If “On” is selected and the signal can be output by the
TV, the AV receiver will output no sound through its
speakers.
• When “TV Control” is enabled, this setting is set to
“Auto”.
components other than
-compatible compo-
nents cannot be guaranteed.
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be
output even if “On” is selected.
• Set to “Disable” when a connected piece of equipment
is not compatible or it is unclear whether the equip-
ment is compatible or not.
• When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On”, or
“TV Control” is set to “Enable” and you’re listening
through your TV’s speakers (see page 43), if you turn
up the AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be
output by the AV receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV
receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the set-
tings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV
receiver’s volume.
• If movement is unnatural when set to “Enable”, change
the setting to “Disable”.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction man-
ual for details.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Control
To link the power functions of
Lock Setup
-compatible
components connected via HDMI, select “Enable”.
Lock
Disable: Power Control disabled.
Enable: Power Control enabled.
Notes:
• The “Power Control” setting can be set only when the
above “Control” setting is set to “Enable”.
With this setting, you can protect your settings by lock-
ing the setup menus.
Locked: Setup menus locked.
Unlocked: Setup menus unlocked (default).
When Locked is selected, only this “Lock Setup” item
can be accessed.
• HDMI power control only works with
-com-
patible components that support it and may not work
properly with some components due to their settings
or compatibility.
• When set to “Enable”, power consumption will
increase.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction man-
ual for details.
TV Control
Set to “Enable” when you want to control the AV
receiver from an
nected to HDMI.
-compatible TV that is con-
Disable: TV Control disabled.
Enable: TV Control enabled.
Notes:
• Set to “Disable” when the TV is not compatible or
when it is unclear whether the TV is compatible or
not.
• The “TV Control” setting can be set only when the
above “Control” and “Power Control” settings are both
set to “Enable”.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction man-
ual for details.
Note:
After changing the settings of the “Control”, “Power
Control”, or “TV Control”, turn off the power to all
connected pieces of equipment and then turn on
again. Refer to the User’s Manuals for all connected
pieces of equipment.
When linking to a TV that conforms to the CEC
standard, the “Monitor Out” setting must be set to
“HDMI Main”.
Network
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Audio Inputs
Specifying the Digital Signal Format
1
2
REC
PLAYLIST
SP
A
SP
B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
AUDIO SEL
DVD
RC-687
M
Normally, the AV receiver detects the format of digital
input signals automatically. However, if you experience
either of the following issues when playing PCM or DTS
sources, you can specify the signal format manually.
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut
off, try the PCM setting.
If you connect a component to more than one audio
input, such as a DVD player connected to analog, digital,
multichannel, and HDMI inputs, you can use the
[AUDIO SEL] button to select which audio input you
want to use to listen to that component.
Press the [AUDIO SEL] button
repeatedly to select an audio
input: HDMI > Auto > Multich >
Analog.
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or rewind-
ing a DTS CD, try the DTS setting.
Press the [AUDIO SEL] button
1
HDMI:
repeatedly to select “Auto”.
Selects the assigned HDMI IN, and
the HDMI indicator appears on the
display. (The HDMI IN must
already be assigned to the current
input selector. See page 56.)
While “Auto” is shown on the
display, use the Left and Right
2
Auto:
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
Selects the assigned COAXIAL or
OPTICAL DIGITAL IN, and the
DIGITAL indicator appears on the
display. (The DIGITAL IN must
already be assigned to the current
is no digital signal, the analog input
is used instead.
PCM:
Only 2-channel PCM format input
signals will be heard. If the input
signal is not PCM, the PCM indica-
tor will flash and noise may also be
produced.
DTS:
Only DTS (but not DTS-HD) for-
mat input signals will be heard. If
the input signal is not DTS, the
DTS indicator will flash and there
will be no sound.
Multich:
Selects the multichannel input, and
the ANALOG indicator appears on
the display. (The multichannel input
must already be assigned to the cur-
rent input selector. See page 60.)
Auto (default):
The format is detected automati-
cally. If no digital input signal is
present, the analog input is used
instead.
Analog:
Selects the analog input, and the
ANALOG indicator appears on the
display.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NET/USB (TX-NR906 only)
Supported Audio File Formats
About NET/USB
For server and USB mass storage device playback, the
AV receiver supports the following music file formats:
MP3, WMA, WAV, and AAC. It also supports
Microsoft’s PlaysForSure technology.
The AV receiver is network-ready, which means you can
hook it up to your home network with a standard Ether-
net cable and enjoy the music files stored on your com-
puter or media server. If your network is connected to the
Internet, you can also enjoy Internet radio.
NET/USB can also be used to play music files stored on
USB mass storage devices (e.g., USB flash drives and
MP3 players), which can be plugged into the AV
receiver’s front panel USB port.
■ MP3
• MP3 files must be MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3 format
with a sampling rate of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz
and a bit-rate of between 32 kbps and 320 kbps.
Incompatible files cannot be played.
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 files are supported.
(Playing times may not display correctly.)
Internet Radio
• MP3 files must have a “.mp3” or “.MP3” filename
extension.
With Internet radio you can:
• Corresponds to M3U, PLS and Podcast playlists and
the streaming of the corresponding audio format noted
below.
• Select stations by entering the appropriate URL with
the remote controller, or connect to the AV receiver
from your computer and select stations in your Web
browser.
■ WMA
WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an audio
compression technology developed by Microsoft Corpo-
ration. Audio can be encoded in WMA format by using
®
Windows Media Player.
• WMA files must have the copyright option turned off.
• Preset up to 20 Internet radio stations.
• Sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz and
bitrates of between 48 kbps and 320 kbps, and lossless
DRM are supported. Incompatible files cannot be
played.
• Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing times
may display incorrectly with VBR.)
■ vTuner Internet Radio
• This unit includes the full vTuner Internet Radio Ser-
vice at no additional charge. Once you have connected
your unit to the Internet you can select vTuner Internet
Radio to search for and play Internet radio stations and
podcasts at any time. To enhance your Internet radio
available to you as an easy way to browse to find sta-
tions, set up/organize your favorites, add your own
stations, get help, etc. After the first time you try Inter-
net radio/vTuner on your unit you can use the MAC
Address of your unit to create a member login account
(email address and password) on the
• WMA files must have a “.wma” or “.WMA” filename
extension.
■ WAV
WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio.
• Sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz and
bitrates of 16 kbps are supported. Incompatible files
cannot be played.
• WAV files must have a “.wav” or “.WAV” filename
extension.
http://onkyo.vtuner.com/ portal. To verify your MAC
Address, please see Network Settings (page 128).
■ AAC
AAC stands for MPEG-4 Audio.
• Sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz and
bitrates of between 16 and 320 kbps, are supported.
Incompatible files cannot be played.
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) files are supported. (Playing
times may not display correctly.)
• M4A files must have a “.m4a” or “.M4A” filename
extension.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USB Mass Storage Device Requirements
Network Requirements
• The AV receiver supports USB devices that support
the USB mass storage device class.
• Playback may not be possible with some USB devices
even if they conform to the USB mass storage device
class.
• USB devices formatted with the FAT16 or FAT32 file
system are supported.
• If the storage device has been partitioned, only music
files in the first partition can be played.
• Each folder may contain up to 500 music files, and
folders may be nested up to eight levels deep.
• Digital audio signals are not output by the digital out-
puts when playing music files.
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not
supported.
■ Ethernet Network
The AV receiver’s Ethernet port supports 10Base-T. For
best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet network is
recommended. Although it’s possible to play music on a
computer that’s connected to the network wirelessly,
playback may be unreliable, so wired connections are
recommended.
■ Ethernet Router
A router manages the network, routing data and supply-
ing IP addresses. Your router must support the following:
• NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows sev-
eral networked computers to access the Internet simul-
taneously via a single Internet connection. The AV
receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio.
Server Requirements
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
DHCP supplies IP addresses to network devices,
allowing them to configure themselves automatically.
The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on a
computer or media server and supports the following
technologies:
• A router with a 100Base-TX switch built-in is recom-
mended.
• Windows Media Player 11
• Windows Media Connect 2.0
• UPnP AV-compatible media server
• DLNA-compatible media server
Some routers have a modem built-in, and some ISPs
require you to use specific routers. Please consult your
ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.
Windows Media Player 11 and Windows Media Connect 2.0
can be downloaded for free from the Microsoft Web site.
• The computer or media server must be on the same
network as the AV receiver.
■ CAT5 Ethernet cable
Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to
connect the AV receiver to your home network.
• Each folder may contain up to 500 music files, and
folders may be nested up to eight levels deep.
• Digital audio signals are not output by the digital out-
puts when playing music files.
■ Internet Access (for Internet radio)
To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must
have Internet access. A narrowband Internet connection
(e.g., 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory
results, so a broadband connection is strongly recom-
mended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc). Please
consult your ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.
Minimum system requirements for Windows
Media Player 11 (for Windows XP)
Operating system
Windows XP Home Edition (SP2), Windows XP Profes-
sional (SP2), Windows XP Tablet PC Edition (SP2), Update
Rollup 2 for Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005
(KB900325), October 2006 Update Rollup for Windows XP
Media Center Edition (KB925766)
Notes:
• To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver, your
broadband Internet connection must be working and
able to access the Web. Consult your ISP if you have
any problems with your Internet connection.
Processor:
233 MHz Intel Pentium II, Advanced
Micro Devices (AMD), etc.
64 MB
200 MB of free space
CD or DVD drive
• The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network
settings automatically. If you want to configure these
settings manually, see page 128.
Memory:
Hard disk:
Drive:
• The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings, so
if you have a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you
must use a PPPoE-compatible router.
Modem:
28.8 kbps
Sound card:
Monitor:
Video card:
Software:
16-bit sound card
Super VGA (800 x 600)
64 MB VRAM, DirectX 9.0b
Microsoft ActiveSync (only when
using a Windows Mobile-based
Pocket PC or smartphone)
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or
Netscape 7.1
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a
proxy server to use Internet radio. If your computer is
configured to use a proxy server, use the same settings
Web browser:
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV Receiver
Playing Music Files on a Server
To connect the AV receiver to your home network, plug
one end of a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable into the AV
receiver’s ETHERNET port, and plug the other end into
a LAN port on your router or switch.
This section explains how to play music files on a com-
puter or media server through the AV receiver. See
page 121 for details on supported music servers and
music file formats.
The following diagram shows how you can connect the
AV receiver to your home network. In this example, it’s
connected to a LAN port on a router, which has a 4-port
100Base-TX switch built-in.
Start your computer or media
server.
1
Press the [NET/USB] INPUT
SELECTOR button to select the
Server screen.
2
TX-NR906
Server
Server1: Shared1
server: MYPC
Internet
ETHERNET
radio
NET/USB
USB/iRADIO
RETURN
REFRESH
1 / 5
Modem
The NETWORK indicator lights up if
the AV receiver is able to establish a
connection to the server. It flashes if a
connection cannot be established.
WAN port
Router
Press the [NET/USB] REMOTE
MODE button to select the
NET/USB remote controller
mode.
3
4
LAN port
LAN port
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select a server, and then
press [ENTER].
LAN/Ethernet port
A list of items on the server appears.
Server1: Shared1
Recently Added
Artists
Album
Computer or media server
Songs
Genre
Year
Rating
NET/USB
USB/iRADIO
RETURN
REFRESH
1 / 10
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item, and then
press [ENTER].
5
A list of music files appears.
All Music
Song 1
Song 2
Song 3
My favorite song 1
My favorite song 2
My favorite song 3
My favorite song 4
My favorite song 5
My favorite song 6
My favorite song 7
1 / 11
NET/USB USB/iRADIO
RETURN RETURN
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows Media Player 11 Setup
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
6
tons to select a music file, and press
This section explains how to configure Windows Media
Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the music files
stored on your computer.
the [ENTER] or Play [1] button
to start playback.
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
Start Windows Media Player 11.
1
My favorite Album
1 / 11
My favorite Album
Artist name
On the Library menu, select Media Shar-
ing.
The Media Sharing dialog box appears.
2
My favorite song 1
WMA 160kbps 16bit/44.1kHz
or
Select the Share my media check box,
and then click OK.
3
RETURN
RETURN
A list of devices that support PlaysForSure
appears.
To return to the previous menu during
playback, press the [Return] button.
To stop playback, press the Stop [2]
button.
To select the next song, press the Next
[6] button. To select the beginning
of the current song, press the Previous
[7] button. To select the previous
song, press the Previous [7] button
twice.
Select the AV receiver in the list, and
then click Allow.
4
Click OK to close the dialog box.
This completes the Windows Media Player 11
configuration.
You can now play the music files in your Win-
dows Media Player 11 library through the AV
receiver (see page 123).
5
Random Playback
To play songs in random order, while the list of songs is
displayed, press the [RANDOM] button. All of the songs
in the current folder will be played in random order.
When all of the songs in the folder have been played
once, they’ll all be played again in a different random
order. To cancel random playback, press the [RAN-
DOM] button again.
Note:
Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free
from the Microsoft Web site.
Random playback supports up to 9,999 songs per folder.
If a folder contains more than this, songs over 9,999 are
not included in random playback.
Repeat Playback
The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY
screen is displayed.
To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while
playback is paused or stopped), press the [REPEAT] but-
ton repeatedly to select: Repeat1, Repeat, All, or Off.
In Repeat1 mode, the current song is played repeatedly.
In Repeat mode, all of the songs in the current folder are
played repeatedly.
In All mode, all of the songs on the current server are
played repeatedly.
To cancel repeat playback, press the [REPEAT] button
repeatedly to select Off.
Note:
If the message “No item” appears, this means that no
information can be retrieved from the server. In this case,
check your server, network, and AV receiver connec-
tions.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Music Files on a USB Device
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select a USB mass stor-
age device, and then press
[ENTER].
4
This section explains how to play music files on a USB
ported USB mass storage devices and music file formats.
TV CH
4
AUX1
AUX
2
A list of the device’s contents appears.
-
TUNER
8
TAPE
7
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
USB Storage
Folder1
Folder2
+10
CLEAR
12
0
NET/USB
ENTER
-- --- 10
11
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
01_Song_Track1
02_Song_Track2
03_Song_Track3
04_Song_Track4
05_Song_Track5
06_Song_Track6
07_Song_Track7
08_Song_Track8
2 / 5
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
NET/USB iRADIO/SERVER
RETURN RETURN
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
To open a folder, use the Up and Down
[q]/[w] buttons to select it, and then
press [ENTER].
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select a music file, and
press the [ENTER] or Play [1]
button to start playback.
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
YLIST
RANDOM
5
Plug your USB mass storage
device into the AV receiver’s USB
port.
1
Press the [NET/USB] INPUT
SELECTOR button repeatedly to
select the USB screen.
Folder1
2
1/17
Album
Artist
02_Song_Track2
01:12:34
00:10
USB
USB Storage
or
MP3 128kbps 16bit/44.1kHz
RETURN RETURN
To return to the previous menu during
playback, press the [RETURN] button.
To stop or pause playback, press the
Stop [2] or Pause [3] button, respec-
tively.
To select the next song, press the Next
[6] button. To select the beginning
of the current song, press the Previous
[7] button. To select the previous
song, press the Previous [7] button
twice.
1 / 1
RETURN
REFRESH
NET/USB
The USB indicator lights up if the AV
receiver is able to read the USB mass
storage device. It flashes if it cannot
read it.
Press the [NET/USB] REMOTE
MODE button to select the
NET/USB remote controller
mode.
3
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Random Playback
To play songs in random order, while the list of songs is
displayed, press the [RANDOM] button. All of the songs
in the current folder will be played in random order.
When all of the songs in the folder have been played
once, they’ll all be played again in a different random
order. To cancel random playback, press the [RAN-
DOM] button again.
Random playback supports up to 9,999 songs per folder.
If a folder contains more than this, songs over 9,999 are
not included in random playback.
Repeat Playback
The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY
screen is displayed.
To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while
playback is paused or stopped), press the [REPEAT] but-
ton repeatedly to select: Repeat1, Repeat, All, or Off.
In Repeat1 mode, the current song is played repeatedly.
In Repeat mode, all of the songs in the current folder are
played repeatedly.
In All mode, all of the songs on the USB mass storage
device (in the same partition) are played repeatedly.
To cancel repeat playback, press the [REPEAT] button
repeatedly to select Off.
Notes:
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV
receiver’s USB port, we recommend that you use its
AC adapter to power it.
• Do not connect the AV receiver’s USB port to a USB
port on your computer. Music on your computer can-
not be played through the AV receiver in this way.
• The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that sup-
port the USB Mass Storage Class standard, which
allows USB storage devices to be connected to com-
puters without the need for special drivers or software.
Note that not all USB MP3 players support the USB
Mass Storage Class standard. Refer your USB MP3
player’s instruction manual for details.
• Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot
be played.
• Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the
loss or damage to data stored on a USB mass storage
device when that device is used with the AV receiver.
We recommend that you back up your important
music files beforehand.
• MP3 players containing music files that are managed
with special music software, and iPods containing
music files managed with iTunes are not supported.
• Operation with all USB mass storage devices includ-
ing the ability to power them is not guaranteed.
• Do not connect your USB mass storage device via a
USB hub. The USB mass storage device must be con-
nected directly to the AV receiver’s USB port.
• If the USB mass storage device contains a lot of data,
the AV receiver make take a while to read it.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to Internet Radio
Press the [NET/USB] REMOTE
MODE button to select the
NET/USB remote controller
mode.
2
3
To receive Internet radio, you must connect the AV
receiver to a network with Internet access (see
page 123).
You can select Internet radio stations by entering the
appropriate URL with the remote controller, or by con-
necting to the AV receiver from your computer and
selecting stations in your Web browser.
Internet radio URLs in the following formats are sup-
ported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However,
depending on the type of data or audio format used by
the Internet radio station, you may not be able to listen to
some stations.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an empty item, and
then press the [SETUP] button.
The URL Input screen appears.
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
Use the remote controller to
enter the URL of the Internet
radio station you want to listen
to.
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
4
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
CLEAR
12
0
NET/USB
-- --- 10
11
/
INPUT SELECTOR
Use the same method as for the “Name
Edit” function on page 110 to enter a
URL.
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
When you’ve finished, select
“OK”, and then press [ENTER].
The station appears in the list.
To update the station list, press
the [RETURN] button.
RECEIVER
DIMMER
+
ENTER
SETUP
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
OR:
On your computer, start your
Web browser and enter the AV
receiver’s IP address in the
browser’s Internet address (URL)
field.
Press the [NET/USB] INPUT
SELECTOR button repeatedly to
select the Internet Radio screen.
1
The browser connects to the AV
receiver and displays the same screen
as the AV receiver.
Select the Internet radio station
with your browser.
Internet Radio
1.vTuner Internet Radio
2.---
3.---
4.---
5.---
6.---
7.---
8.---
9.---
Notes:
10.---
RETURN
REFRESH
SETUP URL
NET/USB
• The AV receiver’s IP address is
shown on the “Network” screen (see
page 128).
The NETWORK indicator lights up if
the AV receiver is able to establish a
connection to the network. It flashes if
a connection cannot be established.
When the program setting is finished,
go to Procedure 5.
• If you’re using DHCP, your router
may not always allocate the same IP
address to the AV receiver, so if you
find that you can’t connect to the AV
receiver, recheck the AV receiver’s
IP address on “Network” screen.
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Settings
Press [ENTER].
The station’s programs are displayed.
5
Note:
When modifying network settings, after modifying it is
necessary to execute
Save Settings.
This section explains how to configure the AV receiver’s
network settings manually.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
6
tons to select a program, and
then press [ENTER].
If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, you don’t need
to change any of these settings, as the AV receiver is set
use DHCP to configure itself automatically by default
(i.e., DHCP is set to Enable). If, however, your router’s
DHCP server is disabled, for example, you’re using
static IP addresses, you’ll need to configure these set-
tings yourself, in which case, a knowledge of Ethernet
networking is essential.
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
PLAY
1 / 11
iRadio station name
- - -
Streaming program name
What’s DHCP?
MP3 128kbps 16bit/44.1kHz
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used
by routers, computers, the AV receiver, and other devices
to automatically configure themselves on a network.
RETURN
RETURN
Refer to page 121 for the Internet
Radio.
What’s DNS?
The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain
names into IP addresses. For example, when you enter a
domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in your Web
browser, before accessing the site, your browser uses
DNS to translate this into an IP address, in this case
63.148.251.142.
Once you’ve added a station to the list, simply select it
on the Internet Radio screen, and then press [ENTER] to
start playback.
Notes:
• When you try the connection after the user preset, if
“[?]” is displayed in the list, URL may be entered
incorrectly. Check the URL again.
• Even if the entered URL is improper (not the applica-
ble playlist format), some contents may be displayed.
In that case, [?] is displayed.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
The main menu appears onscreen.
• When connected to an Internet radio station that uses
the MP3 streaming format, the MP3 indicator lights
up. When connected to an Internet radio station that
uses the WMA streaming format, the WMA indicator
lights up.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
2
• If you’re using a narrowband Internet connection (e.g.,
56K modem or ISDN), depending on the station,
Internet radio may not work satisfactorily. For best
results, use a broadband connection (e.g., cable
modem, xDSL modem, etc).
tons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
7. Hardware Setup
1. Remote Control
2. Zone2/Zone3
3. Tuner
4. Analog Multich
5. HDMI
6. Network
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
ENTER
RETURN
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
3
This setting enables or disables control over the network.
Enable: Control over the network enabled.
Disable: Control over the network disabled.
tons to select “6. Network”, and
then press [ENTER].
The “Network” screen appears.
■ Port
7-6. Network
MAC Address
Control
Port
xx : xx : xx : xx : xx : xx
This is the network port used for control over the net-
work.
Enable
xxxxx
DHCP
This setting determines whether or not the AV receiver
uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server settings.
Enable: DHCP enabled.
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
VALUE
INPUT
RETURN
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select the settings, and
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to set them.
To enter an IP address, select the set-
ting, and then press [ENTER]. The
arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons can
then be used to enter numbers. Press
[ENTER] again to set the number.
The settings are explained on the next
page.
4
5
Disable: DHCP disabled.
If you select “Disable”, you must configure the “IP
Address”, “Subnet Mask”, “Gateway”, and “DNS
Server” settings yourself.
IP Address
If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
specify an IP address. Enter a static IP address provided
by your ISP.
The IP address must be within the following ranges.
ClassA: 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
ClassB: 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
ClassC: 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
Most routers use Class C IP addresses.
When you’ve finished, press the
Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select “ Save Settings”, and
then press [ENTER].
Setup closes.
Subnet Mask
7-6. Network
Proxy
Proxy URL
Disable
8080
If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
specify a subnet mask address.
Proxy Port
Save Settings
Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP
(typically: 255.255.255.0).
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
VALUE
ENTER
RETURN
Gateway
When modifying network settings,
after modifying it is necessary to exe-
cute “ Save Settings”.
If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
specify a gateway address.
Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
6
DNS Server
If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
specify a DNS server.
Enter the DNS server addresses provided by your ISP.
Proxy URL
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here.
Proxy Port
If you’re using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port number
here.
Mac Address
This is the AV receiver’s MAC (Media Access Control)
address. This address cannot be changed.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3
In addition to your main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in two other rooms, or as we call them, Zone 2
and Zone 3. And, you can select a different source for each room.
Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers to an
Amp in Zone 2
Connecting Zone 2
There are two ways you can connect Zone 2 speakers:
This setup allows 7.1-channel playback in your main lis-
1. Connect them directly to the AV receiver.
tening room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2,
2. Connect them to an amp in Zone 2.
with a different source in each room.
Hookup
Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers Directly
to the AV receiver
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input
This setup allows 5.1-channel playback in your main
room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2, with a
different source in each room. This is called Powered
Zone 2, as the Zone 2 speakers are powered by the AV
receiver. Note that when Powered Zone 2 is turned off,
you can enjoy 7.1-channel playback in your main room.
on your Zone 2 amp.
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker termi-
nals on your Zone 2 amp.
Main room
TV
To use this setup, you must set the “Speaker Type:
Front(Speaker B)” setting to “Not Use” (see
page 61), and set the “Powered Zone 2” setting to
Hookup
AV receiver
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 L/R speaker terminals.
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
L
R
Main room
PRE OUT
TV
Zone 2
IN
R
L
Receiver/
integrated amp
AV receiver
Note:
With the default settings, the Zone 2 volume must be set
on the Zone 2 amp. If your Zone 2 amp has no volume
control, set the “Zone2 Out” setting to “Variable” so that
you can set the Zone 2 volume on the AV receiver (see
Zone 2
R
L
Notes:
• With this setup, the Zone 2 volume is controlled by the
AV receiver.
• Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if “Speaker Type:
Front(Speaker A)” is set to “Bi-Amp” or “BTL”, or
“Speaker Type: Front(Speaker B)” is set to “Normal”,
“Bi-Amp”, or “BTL” (page 61).
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 Video Output
Connecting Zone 3
The AV receiver features a composite video output for
connection to a TV in Zone 2, so you can enjoy both
audio and video in that zone.
Zone 3 speakers must be connected to an amp in Zone 3.
Connecting Your Zone 3 Speakers
Hookup
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 3 and
a different source to those selected for your main room
and Zone 2.
• Use a composite video cable to connect the AV
receiver’s ZONE 2 OUT V jack to a composite video
input on your Zone 2 TV.
Hookup
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 3 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input
on your Zone 3 amp.
Main room
TV
• Connect your Zone 3 speakers to the speaker termi-
nals on your Zone 3 amp.
Main room
AV receiver
ZONE 2
OUT
TV
Zone 2
AV receiver
TV
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
L
R
Note:
PRE OUT
The ZONE 2 OUT V jack outputs video from compo-
nents connected to composite video inputs and S-Video
inputs.
Zone 3
IN
R
L
Zone 2 12V Trigger
Receiver/
integrated amp
When Zone 2 is turned on, the output from the 12V
TRIGGER OUT ZONE 2 goes high (+12 volts, 100 mil-
liamperes max). Connecting this jack to a 12-volt trigger
input on a component in Zone 2 will make that compo-
nent turn on or off as and when Zone 2 is turned on or off
on the AV receiver.
Note:
With the default settings, the Zone 3 volume must be set
on the Zone 3 amp. If your Zone 3 amp has no volume
control, set the “Zone3 Out” setting to “Variable” so that
you can set the Zone 3 volume on the AV receiver (see
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Powered Zone2 Setting
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. Zone2/Zone3”,
and then press [ENTER].
3
4
If you’ve connected your Zone 2 speakers to the AV
receiver, as explained in “Connecting Your Zone 2
Speakers Directly to the AV receiver” on page 130, you
must set the “Powered Zone2” setting to “Act” (Acti-
vated).
The “Zone2/Zone3” screen appears.
7-2. Zone2/Zone3
Powered Zone2
Zone2 Out
Zone3 Out
Not Act
Fixed
Fixed
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
1
GAME/TV
4
MOVE
VALUE
RETURN
AUX1
5
AUX2
6
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Powered Zone2”,
and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
NotAct: ZONE 2 L/R speaker termi-
nals not activated (Powered
Zone 2 disabled).
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
CLEAR
12
0
-- --- 10
11
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
+
Act: ZONE 2 L/R speaker termi-
nals activated (Powered Zone
2 enabled).
ENTER
SETUP
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
DISPLAY
MUTING
LIST
RANDOM
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Notes:
• When “Act” is selected and Zone 2 turned on, the
Zone 2 speakers connected to the ZONE 2 L/R
speaker terminals output sound, but the surround back
speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R speaker
terminals do not. When “Act” is selected and Zone 2
turned off, the surround back speakers output sound as
normal.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
2
• Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if “Speaker Type:
Front(Speaker A)” is set to “Bi-Amp” or “BTL”, or
“Speaker Type: Front(Speaker B)” is set to “Normal”,
“Bi-Amp”, or “BTL” (page 61).
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
5
If you’ve connected your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to
an amp with no volume control, set the “Zone2 Out” or
“Zone3 Out” setting, respectively, to “Variable” so that
you can set the zone’s volume, balance, and tone on the
AV receiver.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
1
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Using Zone 2 and Zone 3
This section explains how to use Zone 2 and Zone 3.
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
TONE
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
2
tons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
OFF
,
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
3
tons to select “2. Zone2/Zone3”,
and then press [ENTER].
STANDBY
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
ON
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
The “Zone2/Zone3” screen appears.
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
INPUT
SELECTOR
7-2. Zone2/Zone3
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Powered Zone2
Zone2 Out
Zone3 Out
Not Act
Fixed
Fixed
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
CLEAR
12
0
-- --- 10
11
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
ZONE3
ZONE2
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RETURN
SETUP
EXIT
MOVE
VALUE
RETURN
DIMMER
+
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Zone2 Out” or
“Zone3 Out”, and use the Left
and Right [e]/[r] buttons to
select:
4
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
PREV
CH
MUTING
DISPLAY
MUTING
Fixed:
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
The Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume must
be set on the amp in that zone.
SP
A
SP
B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
Variable:
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
The Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume can
be set on the AV receiver.
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
LEVEL–,
LEVEL+
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
DVD
RC-687
M
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
your main room, SIRIUS for Zone 2, and AM/FM for
Zone 3.
Selecting an Input Source for Zones
On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE2] or [ZONE3] REMOTE
MODE button.
Turning Off Zones
1
Remote
controller
On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE2] or [ZONE3] REMOTE
MODE button.
1
On the AV receiver, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
Remote
controller
AV receiver
On the AV receiver, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator
flashes, and the input selector currently
selected for the zone appears on the dis-
play.
AV receiver
The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator
flashes.
On the remote controller, use the
INPUT SELECTOR buttons.
2
Remote
controller
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
On the remote controller, press
the [STANDBY] button.
On the AV receiver, use the input
selector buttons, or press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button
repeatedly.
2
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
3
AUX
6
2
Remote
controller
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
On the AV receiver, press the
[OFF] button.
PHONO
+10
NET/USB
0
The input source is selected, the zone is
turned on, the name of the input selec-
tor appears on the display, and the
ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator lights
continuously.
The zone is turned off, and the ZONE 2
AV receiver
or
AV receiver
or ZONE 3 indicator goes off.
You can also use the AV receiver’s
INPUT SELECTOR buttons.
Note:
When Zone 2 is turned off, the output from the 12V
TRIGGER OUT ZONE 2 goes low (0 volts).
Notes:
• To select AM or FM, press the [TUNER] input selec-
tor button repeatedly. On the North American model,
you can also select XM or SIRIUS.
• Only analog input sources are output by the ZONE 2
PRE OUT, ZONE 3 PRE OUT and ZONE 2 L/R
speaker terminals. Digital input sources are not out-
put. If no sound is heard when an input source is
selected, check if it’s connected to an analog input.
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, listening modes
that need surround back speakers (i.e., Dolby Digital
EX, DTS-ES, and THX Ultra2 Cinema) are unavail-
able.
• When Zone2 is on, Pure Audio cannot be selected.
• When Zone 2 is turned on, the output from the 12V
TRIGGER OUT ZONE 2 goes high (+12 volts).
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power On/
Standby and Direct Change u functions do not
work.
• You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations
for your main room, Zone 2, and Zone 3. The same
AM/FM radio station will be heard in each room.
• On the North American model, you can select a differ-
ent radio source for each room. For example, XM for
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Volume of Zones
Adjusting the Tone and Balance of Zones
On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE2] or [ZONE3] REMOTE
MODE button.
On the AV receiver, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
1
1
Remote
controller
AV receiver
On the AV receiver, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
AV receiver
The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator
flashes.
Press the AV receiver’s [TONE]
button repeatedly to select
2
“Bass” “Treble” or “Balance”.
On the remote controller, press
the [LEVEL–] and [LEVEL+] but-
ton.
2
Use the Up [r] and Down [e]
3
Remote
controller
buttons to adjust the Bass, Tre-
ble or Balance.
• You can boost or cut the Bass or Tre-
ble from –10 dB to +10 dB in 2 dB
steps.
On the AV receiver, press Up [r]
and Down [e] button.
AV receiver
• You can adjust the balance from 0 in
the center to +10 dB to the right or
+10 dB to the left in 2 dB steps.
Notes:
Note:
• The tone cannot be adjusted for Zone 3.
Zones can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.
• The Zone 2 level, balance, and tone functions have no
effect on the ZONE 2 PRE OUT when the “Zone2
Out” setting is set to “Fixed” (page 133).
Muting Zones
• The Zone 3 level and balance functions have no effect
on the ZONE 3 PRE OUT when the “Zone3 Out” set-
ting is set to “Fixed” (page 133).
On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE2] or [ZONE3] REMOTE
MODE button, and then press the
[MUTING] button.
To unmute a zone, on the remote
controller, press the [ZONE2] or
[ZONE3] REMOTE MODE button,
and then press the [MUTING] but-
ton again.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet
Using the Remote Controller in
In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals
from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV
receiver located in the cabinet via the connecting block.
Zone 2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits
To control the AV receiver with the remote controller
while you’re in Zone 2 or Zone 3, you’ll need a commer-
cially available multiroom remote control kit for each
zone.
IR Receiver
• Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.
Connecting
block
These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear line
of sight to the AV receiver’s remote sensor, such as when
it’s installed inside a cabinet.
IR IN
Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone 2/3
Inside
cabinet
In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone 2/3 picks up the
infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds
them through to the AV receiver in the main room via the
connecting block.
Remote controller
Signal flow
Using a Multiroom Kit with Other
Components
IR IN
IR Receiver
Connecting
In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV
receiver’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other
component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals
received at the AV receiver’s IR IN jack are fed through
to the other component via the IR emitter. Signals picked
up by the AV receiver’s remote control sensor are not
output.
block
Remote controller
Main room
Zone 2/3
Signal flow
IR Receiver
Connecting
block
The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be
connected to the AV receiver’s IR IN jack, as shown
below.
IR IN
AV receiver
IR OUT
IR Emitter
From the connecting block
Remote controller
Other component
Miniplug cable
Signal flow
The IR emitter should be connected to the AV receiver’s
IR OUT jack, as shown below.
AV receiver
Miniplug cable
Other component
Remote control
sensor
Emitter
IR
IN
Miniplug
IR Emitter
OUT
AV receiver
Signal flow
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
You can control your other components, including those
made by other manufacturers, with the remote controller.
This section explains how to:
• Enter the remote control code for a component that
you want to control: DVD, TV, VCR, etc.
While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button to which you want
to enter the code, press the
[STANDBY] button.
2
The Remote indicator lights up.
• Learn commands directly from another component’s
remote controller (see page 140).
• Program the MACRO buttons to perform a sequence
of up to eight remote control actions (see page 141).
Entering Remote Control Codes
To control another component, you must first enter that
component’s remote control code to a REMOTE MODE
button. You’ll need to enter a code for each component
that you want to control.
Within 30 seconds, use the num-
ber buttons to enter the 4-digit
remote control code.
3
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Remote
NET/USB
0
indicator
STANDBY
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
TV
I
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
Number
buttons
AUX2
6
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Press the REMOTE MODE button
again to select the remote con-
troller mode, point the remote
controller at the component, and
check the operation.
If the remote controller doesn’t work as
expected, and several remote codes are
listed, try each one in turn and use the
one that works best.
4
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
CLEAR
0
-- --- 10
11
12
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
REMOTE
MODE
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
Notes:
PREV
CH
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for the
[RECEIVER], [ZONE 2], [ZONE 3], and
[NET/USB] REMOTE MODE buttons.
DISPLAY
MUTING
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
• The remote control codes provided are correct at the
time of printing but subject to change.
SP
A
SP
B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
• The [DVD] and [CD] REMOTE MODE buttons
are preprogrammed for use with Onkyo DVD
players and CD players, respectively.
-
+
LEVEL
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
DVD
• To control another manufacturer’s CD recorder,
MD recorder or Onkyo RI Dock, enter the appro-
priate remote control code to the [CD] REMOTE
MODE button.
RC-687
M
Look up the component’s remote
control code in the separate
Remote Control Codes list.
1
The codes are organized by category.
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note:
Remote Control Codes for Onkyo
If you connect an u-capable Onkyo MiniDisc
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE IN/OUT
jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the AUX 1 jacks, for u
to work properly, you must set the Input Display accord-
Components Connected via u
Onkyo components that are connected via u are con-
trolled by pointing the remote controller at the AV
receiver, not the component. This allows you to control
components that are out of view, in a rack, for example.
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons
Make sure the Onkyo component is con-
1
You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default
remote control code.
nected with an u cable and an analog
audio cable (RCA).
See page 50 for details.
While holding down the REMOTE
1
MODE button that you want to
reset, press the TV [9] button.
The Remote indicator flashes three
times.
Enter the appropriate remote control code
to the REMOTE MODE button.
2
• [DVD] REMOTE MODE button
5002: Onkyo DVD player with u
• [CD] REMOTE MODE button
6002: Onkyo CD player with u
• [MD] REMOTE MODE button
6008: Onkyo MD recorder with u
Press the REMOTE MODE button
again.
2
• [CDR] REMOTE MODE button
The Remote indicator flashes twice,
indicating that the button has been
reset.
The [DVD] and [CD] REMOTE
MODE buttons are preprogrammed
with remote control codes for control-
ling Onkyo DVD players and CD play-
ers, respectively. When these buttons
are reset, the preprogrammed codes are
restored.
6006: Onkyo CD recorder with u
• [DOCK] REMOTE MODE button
6004: Onkyo RI Dock with u
See the previous page for how to enter remote
control codes.
Press the REMOTE MODE button, point
the remote controller at the AV receiver,
and operate the component.
3
Resetting the Remote Controller
If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing
the remote controller directly at it, or you want to control
an Onkyo component that’s not connected via u, use
the following remote control codes:
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.
While holding down the
1
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-
ton, press the [STANDBY] button.
The Remote indicator flashes five
times.
• [DVD] REMOTE MODE button
5001: Onkyo DVD player without u (default)
• [CD] REMOTE MODE button
6001: Onkyo CD player without u (default)
• [MD] REMOTE MODE button
6007: Onkyo MD recorder without u
• [CDR] REMOTE MODE button
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button again.
2
6005: Onkyo CD recorder without u
The Remote indicator flashes twice,
indicating that the remote controller
has been reset.
• [DOCK] REMOTE MODE button
6003: Onkyo RI Dock without u
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To control another component, point the remote controller at it and use the buttons explained below. (You must select
the appropriate remote controller mode with the REMOTE MODE buttons first.) With some components, certain but-
tons may not work as expected, and some may not work at all.
■ Controlling a TV
■ Controlling a VCR
■ Controlling a Satellite or
Cable Receiver
Press [VCR] first
Press [CABLE] (SAT) first
Press [TV] first
ON
STANDBY
TV
1
2
ON
STANDBY
ON
STANDBY
INPUT
TV
TV
5
3
INPUT
1
2
INPUT
1
2
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
3
1
GAME/TV
4
+
TV CH
-
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
1
GAME/TV
4
2
AUX1
5
+
TV CH
-
AUX1
5
AUX2
1
GAME/TV
4
+
TV CH
-
AUX2
6
AUX1
5
AUX2
6
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
6
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
6
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
CLEAR
12
0
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
11
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
+10
-- --- 10
/
CLEAR
0
11
12
11
12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
3
3
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
REMOTE MODE
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
DVD
VCR
CD
REMOTE MODE
CDR/MD/DOCK
DVD
VCR
CD
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
CDR/MD/DOCK
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
DIMMER
DIMMER
8
8
3
9
+
8
9
4
8
4
+
CH
+
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
CH
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
8
7
-
-
PREV
CH
PREV
CH
9
9
8
8
PREV
CH
4
DISPLAY
MUTING
5
6
DISPLAY
MUTING
5
6
DISPLAY
MUTING
8
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
8
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
REC
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
SP
A
SP
B
7
LISTENING MODE
SURR
SP
A
SP
B
SP
A
SP
B
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
LISTENING MODE
SURR
STEREO
STEREO
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
REPEAT
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
PURE
A
THX
ALL ST
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
-
LEVEL
+
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
-
LEVEL
+
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
TEST TONE
CH SEL
LEVEL
-
LEVEL
+
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
DVD
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L
NIGHT
Re-EQ
HDD
7
DVD
DVD
RC-687
M
RC-687
M
RC-687
M
a [ON], [STANDBY], TV
a [ON], [STANDBY]
a [ON], [STANDBY]
[9]*
Set the satellite/cable receiver
to On or Standby.
Set the VCR to On or Standby.
Set the TV to On or Standby.
b Number buttons
b Number buttons
b Number buttons
Enter numbers.
Enter numbers.
Enter numbers.
c [CLEAR]
c [CH +/–], TV CH [+]/[–]*
c [CLEAR]
Cancels functions.
Select channels on the TV.
Cancels functions.
d [CH +/–]
d [PREV CH]
d [CH +/–]
Selects channels on the VCR.
Selects the previous channel.
Selects satellite/cable chan-
nels.
e [PREV CH]
e [TV INPUT]*
Selects the TV’s external
inputs.
Selects the previous channel.
e [PREV CH]
f REC [y]
Selects the previous channel.
Starts recording.
f TV VOL [q]/[w]*
f [GUIDE]
g Eject [0]
Adjust the TV’s volume.
Displays the program guide.
Ejects the videocassette.
g [MUTING]
g [5], [4]
h [1], [3], [2], [5], [4]
Play, Pause, Stop, Rewind, and
Fast forward.
Mutes the TV.
Fast Reverse and Fast forward.
h [q]/[w]/[e]/[r]/[MENU]/
[ENTER]/[RETURN]
h [q]/[w]/[e]/[r]/[MENU]/
[ENTER]/[RETURN]
i [q]/[w]/[e]/[r]/[MENU]/
[ENTER]/[RETURN]
Navigate menus on the TV.
Navigate menus on the satel-
lite/cable receiver.
Navigate menus on the VCR.
*Buttons marked with an asterisk
(*) are exclusively for controlling a
TV and can be used at any time,
regardless of the currently selected
remote controller mode.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Learning Commands
If the command is learned successfully,
the Remote indicator flashes twice.
The AV receiver’s remote controller can learn the com-
mands of other remote controllers. By transmitting, for
example, the Play command from your CD player’s
remote controller, the remote controller can learn it, and
then transmit the exact same command when its Play
[1] button is pressed in the CD remote mode.
This is useful when you’ve entered the appropriate
work as expected.
V O L U M E
M U T I N
T O N E
T E S T
C H S E L
C
D
P E T
T U N E R
D V D
T A P
I N P U T
M U L T I - C H
P H O N O
G R O U P
M O D E
S U R
D I S C
T U N E R
C
D
V I D E O - 2
I N P U T E L E C T O R
T A E
D I M M E R
E P
About 2 to 6
V I D E O - 1
S L E
D V
P O W E R
inches (5–15 cm)
O
N
D
S
V
T
A
N
D
D
G
1
A
M
B
Y
E
D
/T
4
C
R
V
T
A
P
E
/D
V
R
2
7
AUX1
PHONO
10
I
C
+
5
B
T
V
T
L
/S
A
-
-
U
N
/
-
E
3
T
-
-
A
U
X
2
N
8
R
IN
P
U
1
E
INPUT
0
SELECTOR
T
1
/U
T
6
S
0
B
C
D
DVD
+
MACRO
T
V
9
1
D.TUN
C
1
CLEAR
H
2
R
E
Supplied
remote controller
(RC-687M)
VCR
M
O
T
V
1
2
TE
V
O
L
CABLE
M
3
O
D
E
SAT
CDR/MD/DOC
CD
Z
N
O
N
E
T
/U
E
3
K
S
B
Z
O
N
E
2
RECE
TAPE/AM
IVER
SLEEP
P
Remote
indicator
To learn more commands, repeat
steps 2 and 3.
4
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
1
Press any REMOTE MODE button
when you’ve finished.
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX2
6
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Notes:
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
• The following buttons cannot learn new commands:
REMOTE MODE, MACRO [1], [2], [3], TV CH
[+]/[–], Re-EQ, LIGHT.
+10
CLEAR
12
0
-- --- 10
11
/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
• When you want to learn the command from your TV’s
Power button, select the TV remote control mode and
use the remote controller’s [STANDBY] button to
learn the command. In the TV remote control mode,
the remote controller’s [STANDBY] and TV [9]
buttons are linked, so using the [STANDBY] button to
learn the command will mean that you can also use the
TV [9] button to turn your TV on or off in TV
remote control mode.
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
1, 4
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
DIMMER
+
CH
ENTER
VOL
DISC
ALBUM
-
• When you want to learn the commands from your
TV’s Channel Up and Down buttons, select the TV
remote control mode and use the remote controller’s
CH [+/–] button (left to the [ENTER] button) to learn
the commands. In the TV remote control mode, the
remote controller’s CH [+/–] and TV CH [+]/[–] but-
tons are linked, so using the CH [+/–] button to learn
these commands will mean that you can also use the
TV CH [+]/[–] buttons to change channels in TV
remote control mode.
DISPLAY
MUTING
While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button for the mode in
which you want to use the com-
mand, press the [ON] button.
The Remote indicator lights up.
1
• The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to
90 commands, although this will be less if commands
that use a lot of memory are learned.
• Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, Pause,
and so on are preprogrammed with commands for
controlling Onkyo CD players, cassette decks, and
DVD players. However, they can learn new com-
mands, and you can restore the preprogrammed com-
mands at any time by resetting the remote controller
(see page 138).
• To overwrite a previously learned command, repeat
this procedure.
• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can
be learned.
Press the button you want to
learn the new command.
2
3
Point the remote controllers at
each other, about 2 to 6 inches
(5–15 cm) apart, and then press
and hold the button whose com-
mand you want to learn until the
Remote indicator flashes.
• When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all
learned commands will be lost and will have to be
learned all over again, so don’t discard your other
remote controllers.
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Macros
Press the buttons whose actions
you want to program into the
macro in the order you want them
performed.
For the CD example in the left column,
you’d press the following buttons:
[ON], [CD] INPUT SELECTOR, [CD]
REMOTE MODE, Play [1].
2
You can program the remote controller’s MACRO but-
tons to perform a sequence of remote control actions.
Example:
To play a CD you typically need to perform the follow-
ing actions:
1. Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button
to select the Receiver remote controller mode.
2. Press the [ON] button to turn on the AV receiver.
3. Press the [CD] INPUT SELECTOR button to
select the CD input source.
When you’ve finished, press the
MACRO button again.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
If you enter eight commands, the pro-
cess will finish automatically.
3
4. Press the [CD] REMOTE MODE button to select
the CD remote controller mode.
5. Press the Play [1] button to start playback on
the CD player.
Note:
If any of the buttons you used to make a macro are taught
new commands, the macro will no longer work properly
and will have to be made again.
You can program a MACRO button so that all five
actions are performed with just one button press.
Running Macros
Making Macros
Each MACRO button can store one macro, and each
macro can contain up to eight commands.
Press the MACRO [1], [2], or [3]
button.
The commands in the macro are trans-
mitted in the order in which they were
programmed. Keep the remote control-
ler pointed at the AV receiver until all
of the commands have been transmit-
ted.
Remote
indicator
ON
STANDBY
TV
INPUT
DVD
VCR/DVR
2
CBL/SAT
3
+
TV CH
-
1
GAME/TV
4
AUX1
5
AUX
6
2
TAPE
7
TUNER
8
CD
9
Macros can be run at any time, regard-
less of the current remote controller
mode.
TV VOL
PHONO
NET/USB
D. TUN
+10
CLEAR
0
-- --- 10
11
12
/
MACRO
1, 2, 3
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
ZONE
ZONE
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE
Deleting Macros
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
REMOTE
MODE
TV
CABLE
SAT
NET/USB
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
RECEIVER
DIMMER
While holding down the
1
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-
ton, press the MACRO button
whose macro you want to delete.
While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button of the remote con-
troller mode you want to use at
the start of the macro, press
MACRO button [1], [2], or [3].
The Remote indicator lights up.
1
Press the MACRO button again.
2
For the CD example in the left column,
you’d press and hold the [RECEIVER]
REMOTE MODE button, and then
press MACRO button [1], [2], or [3].
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for a
solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue
yourself, contact your Onkyo dealer.
• If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the display,
press the remote controller’s [MUTING] button to
• While a pair of headphones is connected to the
PHONES jack, no sound is output by the speakers
• Check the digital audio output setting on the con-
nected device. On some game consoles, such as those
that support DVD, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio output format from a menu.
• If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must use
an MC head amp or MC transformer (page 46).
• The input signal format is set to PCM or DTS. Set it to
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting
the AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo
dealer.
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults,
turn it on and, while holding down the [VCR/DVR]
button, press the [ON/STANDBY] button. “Clear”
will appear on the display and the AV receiver will
enter Standby mode.
VCR/DVR
• If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an
HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output settings,
and be sure to select a supported audio format.
• Make sure that none of the connecting cables are bent,
twisted, or damaged.
Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your
radio presets and custom settings.
Power
Only the front speakers produce sound
• When the Stereo listening mode is selected, only the
front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to
“L/R” (page 106).
Can’t turn on the AV receiver
• Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged into
the wall outlet.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait 5
seconds or more, then plug it in again.
The AV receiver turns off as soon as it’s turned
on
Only the center speaker produces sound
• If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music, or Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game listen-
ing mode with a mono source, such as an AM radio
station or mono TV program, the sound is concen-
trated in the center speaker.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to
• The amp protection circuit has been activated.
Remove the power cord from the wall outlet immedi-
ately. Disconnect all speaker cables and input sources,
and leave the AV receiver with its power cord discon-
nected for 1 hour. After that, reconnect the power cord
and set the volume to maximum. If the AV receiver
stays on, set the volume to minimum, disconnect the
power cord, and reconnect your speakers and input
sources. If the AV receiver turns off when you set the
volume to maximum, disconnect the power cord, and
contact your Onkyo dealer.
The surround speakers produce no sound
• When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected,
the surround speakers produce no sound.
• Depending on the source and the current listening
mode, not much sound may be produced by the sur-
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly
Audio
There’s no sound or it’s very quiet
• Make sure that the digital input source is selected
• Make sure that the correct audio input is selected
The center speaker produces no sound
• When the Stereo listening mode is selected, the center
speaker produces no sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to
• Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 33).
• Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is
correct, and that the bare wires are in contact with the
• Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.
• Check the volume. It can be set to −∞ dB, −81.5 dB
designed for home theater enjoyment. It has a wide
volume range, allowing precise adjustment.
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The surround back speakers produce no sound
The Late Night function doesn’t work
• Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital, Dolby
Digital Plus, and Dolby TrueHD (page 109).
•
The surround back speakers are not used with all lis-
tening modes. Select another listening mode (page 81).
• Not much sound may be produced by the surround
back speakers with some sources.
The DVD analog multichannel input doesn’t
work
• Check the DVD multichannel input connections
• Make sure that the multichannel input is assigned to
the input selector (page 60).
•
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the
main room is reduced to 5.1-channels and the sur-
The subwoofer produces no sound
• When you play source material that contains no infor-
mation in the LFE channel, the subwoofer produces
no sound.
• Make sure that the multichannel input is selected
• Make sure that the “Speaker Type” is not set to
“Bi-Amp”. The multichannel DVD input cannot be
used if “Speaker Type” is set to “Bi-Amp” (page 61).
• Check the audio output settings on your DVD player.
•
The Zone 2/3 speakers produce no sound
• The Zone 2/3 speakers only output sources that are
connected to an analog input. Check to see if the
source component is connected to an analog input.
• Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if “Speaker Type:
Front(Speaker A)” is set to “Bi-Amp” or “BTL”, or
“Speaker Type: Front(Speaker B)” is set to “Normal”,
“Bi-Amp”, or “BTL” (page 61).
About DTS signals
•
When DTS program material ends and the DTS bit-
stream stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS listening
mode and the DTS indicator remains on. This is to pre-
vent noise when you use the pause, fast forward, or fast
reverse function on your player. If you switch your
player from DTS to PCM, because the AV receiver does
not switch formats immediately, you may not hear any
sound, in which case you should stop your player for
about three seconds, and then resume playback.
There’s no sound with a certain signal format
• Check the digital audio output setting on the source
component. On some game consoles, such as those
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio format from a menu or with the [AUDIO] button
on your DVD player’s remote controller.
• With some CD players, you won’t be able to playback
DTS material properly even though your player is
connected to a digital input on the AV receiver. This is
usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed
(e.g., output level, sampling rate, or frequency
response changed) and the AV receiver doesn’t recog-
nize it as a genuine DTS signal. In such cases, you
may hear noise.
• Depending on the input signal, some listening modes
cannot be selected (pages 82-86).
Can’t get 6.1- or 7.1-channel playback
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the
main room is reduced to 5.1-channels and the sur-
• When playing DTS program material, using the pause,
fast forward, or fast reverse function on your player
may produce a short audible noise. This is not a mal-
function.
Can’t select the Pure Audio listening mode
• The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected
while Zone 2 is on.
The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN
can’t be heard
• Since it takes longer to identify the format of an
HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio sig-
nals, sound may not be output immediately.
The volume cannot be set as required (The vol-
ume cannot be set to +18.0 dB)
• Check to see if a maximum volume has been set
Video
• After the Automatic Speaker Setup function has been
run, or the volume level of each individual speaker has
ume may be reduced.
There’s no picture
• Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 33).
Noise can be heard
• Make sure that each video component is properly con-
• Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power
cords, speaker cables, and so on can degrade audio
performance, so don’t use them.
• An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try
repositioning your cables.
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
the AV receiver is connected is selected.
• While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the
video circuitry is turned off and only video signals
input through HDMI IN can be output.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If your TV is connected to the HDMI output, set the
“Monitor Out” setting to “HDMI Main” or “HDMI
Setup” on page 56 to watch composite video, S-Video,
and component video sources.
• Concrete walls weaken radio signals.
• If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor
antenna.
Remote Controller
• If your TV is connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT, set the “Monitor Out” setting to
nent Video Setup” on page 58 to watch composite
video and S-Video sources.
• If the video source is connected to a component video
input, you must assign that input to an input selector
(page 58), and your TV must be connected to either
the HDMI OUT or COMPONENT VIDEO MONI-
The remote controller doesn’t work
• Make sure that the batteries are installed with the cor-
• Make sure that the remote controller is not too far
away from the AV receiver, and that there’s no
obstruction between the remote controller and the AV
receiver’s remote control sensor (page 15).
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-
• Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control
code (page 137).
• If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,
you must assign that input to an input selector
(page 56), and your TV must be connected to the
HDMI OUT (page 42).
• Install new batteries. Don’t mix different types of bat-
• Make sure that the AV receiver is not subjected to
direct sunshine or inverter-type fluorescent lights.
Relocate if necessary.
There’s no picture from a source connected to
an HDMI IN
• When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog”,
and the “Resolution” setting is set to anything other
the HDMI OUT.
• If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, this indicates that your TV does not
support the current video resolution and you need to
select another resolution on your DVD player.
•
If the AV receiver is installed in a rack or cabinet with
colored-glass doors, the remote controller may not work
reliably when the doors are closed.
• When using the remote controller to control other
manufacturers’ AV components, some buttons may
not work as expected.
• Make sure to set the same ID on both the AV receiver
The onscreen menus don’t appear
Can’t control other components
• If your TV is connected to the analog outputs, set the
“Monitor Out” setting to “Analog” (page 52).
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
the AV receiver is connected is selected.
• If it’s an Onkyo component, make sure that the u
cable and analog audio cable are connected properly.
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-
• If you’ve connected an u-capable Onkyo MD
recorder, CD recorder, u Dock to the TAPE IN/OUT
jacks, or an u Dock to the AUX 1 jacks, for the
remote controller to work properly, you must set the
If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the
appropriate remote control code (page 137).
• The entered remote control code may not be correct. If
more than one code is listed, try each one.
• If none of the codes work, use the Learning function
to learn the commands of the other component’s
remote controller (page 140).
• With some AV components, certain buttons may not
work as expected, and some may not work at all.
• To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via
u, point the remote controller at the AV receiver. Be
sure to enter the appropriate remote control code first
•
On non-North American models, specify the TV system
used in your area in the “TV Format Setup
The immediate display does not appear
• The immediate display will not appear when the input
signal from the COMPONENT VIDEO IN is output to
a device connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT.
• Depending on the input signal, the immediate display
may not appear when the input signal from the HDMI
IN is output to a device connected to the HDMI OUT.
Tuner
Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is
noisy, or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t
appear
• Relocate your antenna.
•
Move the AV receiver away from your TV or computer.
• When listening to an AM station, operating the remote
controller may cause noise.
• Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected
via u, or another manufacturer’s component, point
the remote controller at that component. Be sure to
enter the appropriate remote control code first
Music Server and Internet Radio
Can’t access the server or Internet radio
• Check the network connection between the AV
receiver and your router or switch.
• Make sure that your modem and router are properly
connected, and make sure they are both turned on.
• Make sure the server is up and running and compatible
Can’t learn commands from another remote
controller
• When learning commands, make sure that the trans-
mitting ends of both remote controllers are pointing at
each other.
Playback stops while listening to music files on
the server
• Make sure your server is compatible with the AV
receiver (page 122).
• Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that
cannot be used for learning? Some commands cannot
be learned, especially those that contain several
instructions.
• If you download or copy large files on your computer,
playback may be interrupted. Try closing any unused
programs, use a more powerful computer, or use a
dedicated server.
• If the server is serving large music files to several net-
worked devices simultaneously, the network may
become overloaded and playback may be interrupted.
Reduce the number of playback devices on the net-
work, upgrade your network, or use a switch instead
of a hub.
Recording
Can’t record
• On your recorder, make sure the correct input is
selected.
• To prevent signal loops and damage to the AV
receiver, input signals are not fed through to outputs
with the same name (e.g., TAPE IN to TAPE OUT or
VCR/DVR IN to VCR/DVR OUT).
• When the Pure Audio listening mode is selected,
video recording is not possible because no video sig-
nals are output. Select another listening mode.
Can’t connect to the AV receiver from a Web
browser
• If you’re using DHCP, your router may not always
allocate the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if
you find that you can’t connect to a server or Internet
radio station, recheck the AV receiver’s IP address on
Network screen.
Zone 2/Zone 3
There’s no sound
• Only components connected to analog inputs can be
played in Zone 2 and Zone 3.
USB Mass Storage Device Playback
Can’t access the music files on a USB device
• Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly.
• The AV receiver supports USB devices that support
the USB mass storage device class. However, play-
back may not be possible with some USB devices
even if they conform to the USB mass storage device
class.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have a games console connected to the
S-Video or composite video input, and the picture
isn’t very clear, you can attenuate the gain.
Others
The sound changes when I connect my head-
phones
• When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio.
Video ATT:OFF: (default).
Video ATT:ON: Gain is reduced by 2 dB.
The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for signal pro-
cessing and control functions. In very rare situations,
severe interference, noise from an external source, or
static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely
event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet, wait at least 5 seconds, and then plug it back
in again.
The speaker volume cannot be set as required
• When the Automatic Speaker Setup function is used,
or the volume is adjusted on the onscreen setup
menus, the maximum possible volume setting may
change.
The speaker distance cannot be set as required
• In some cases, corrected values suitable for home the-
ater use may be set automatically.
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by
this unit’s malfunction. Before you record important
data, make sure that the material will be recorded cor-
rectly.
The display doesn’t work
• The display is turned off when the Pure Audio listen-
ing mode is selected.
How do I change the language of a multiplex
source
• On the “Audio Adjust” menu, change the “Multiplex”
setting to “Main” or “Sub” (page 107).
For North American model, set the AV receiver to
Standby before disconnecting the power cord from the
wall outlet. For other models, set the AV receiver to
Standby and the POWER switch to OFF before discon-
necting the power cord.
The u functions don’t work
• To use u, you must make an u connection and an
analog audio connection (RCA) between the compo-
nent and AV receiver, even if they are connected digi-
tally (page 50).
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected, the u functions
don’t work.
The functions Auto Power On/Standby and
Direct Change don’t work for components con-
nected via u
• These functions don’t work when Zone 2 is turned on.
When performing “Automatic Speaker Setup”,
the measurement fails showing the message
“Ambient noise is too high”.
• This can be caused by any malfunction in your speaker
unit. Check if the unit produces normal sounds.
The following settings can be made for the S-
Video and composite video inputs
You must use the buttons on the unit to make these set-
tings.
1. While holding down the input selector button for the
input source that you want to set, press the [SETUP]
button.
2. Use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to change
the setting.
3. Press the [SETUP] button when you’ve finished.
• Video Attenuation
This setting can be made for the DVD, VCR/DVR,
CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, or AUX input.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Resolution Chart
The following tables show how video signals at different resolutions are output by the AV receiver.
✔: Output
NTSC
Output
*1
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO COMPOSITE
HDMI
Input
HDMI
1080p 1080i 720p 480p
480i 1080i 720p 480p
480i
480i
480i
1080p
1080i
720p
480p
480i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
1080i
720p
480p
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
COMPONENT
*2
*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
480i
480i
480i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
S-VIDEO
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
COMPOSITE
PAL
Output
*1
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO COMPOSITE
HDMI
Input
HDMI
1080p 1080i 720p 576p
576i 1080i 720p 576p
576i
576i
576i
1080p
1080i
720p
576p
576i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
1080i
720p
576p
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
COMPONENT
*2
*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
576i
576i
576i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
S-VIDEO
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
COMPOSITE
*1 The video signal is output only when the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”.
*2 The output is limited to 480p for an effective signal in the effect of Macrovision.
: The video signal is output only when the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog”.
: The video signal will be output only when the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog” and the “Resolu-
tion” setting is set to “Through”.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications (TX-SR876)
Amplifier Section
General
Rated Output Power
North American:
Power Supply
North American:
European:
Asian:
Power Consumption
North American:
European and Asian: 870 W
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
AC 220-240 V, 50 Hz
AC 120/220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
140 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a
maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05% (FTC)
160 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC)
170 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 6 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.1% (FTC)
9.6 A
435 × 194 × 458.5 mm
17-1/8"
×
7-5/8"× 18-1/16"
European:
Weight
North American:
7 ch × 200 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)
24.1 kg
53.1 lbs.
Asian:
7 ch × 200 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)
European and Asian: 23.3 kg
51.4 lbs.
Maximum Output Power
Asian:
■ Video Input
7 ch × 250 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (JEITA)
HDMI
IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4
IN 1 (DVD), IN 2, IN 3
Dynamic Power
320 W (3 Ω, Front)
270 W (4 Ω, Front)
160 W (8 Ω, Front)
Component
S-Video
DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX 1, AUX 2
DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX 1, AUX 2
THD (Total Harmonic
Distortion)
Damping Factor
Composite
0.05% (Power Rated)
60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8 Ω)
Input Sensitivity and
Impedance
■ Video Output
HDMI
Component
S-Video
200 mV/ 47 kΩ (LINE)
2.5 mV/47 kΩ (PHONO MM)
OUT MAIN, OUT SUB
MONITOR OUT
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT,
ZONE 2 OUT
Output Level and
Impedance
Phono Overload
Frequency Response
Tone Control
200 mV/ 470 Ω (REC OUT)
70 mV (MM 1 kHz, 0.5%)
5 Hz–100 kHz/ +1 dB–3 dB (Direct mode)
10 dB, 20 Hz (BASS)
10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A)
Composite
■ Audio Inputs
Digital Inputs
OPTICAL: 2 (Rear), 1 (Front)
COAXIAL: 3 (Rear)
MULTI CH (FRONT, CENTER,
SUBWOOFER, SURR, SURR BACK,
DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX 1, TAPE, CD, PHONO, AUX 2
Signal to Noise Ratio
Speaker Impedance
Analog Inputs
4 Ω – 16 Ω
Video Section
Multichannel Inputs
7.1
Input Sensitivity/Output
Level and Impedance
1 Vp-p /75 Ω
(Component and S-Video Y)
0.7 Vp-p /75 Ω (Component Pb/Cb,Pr/Cr)
0.28 Vp-p /75 Ω (S-Video C)
1 Vp-p /75 Ω (Composite)
■ Audio Outputs
Digital Output
Analog Outputs
OPTICAL: 1 (Rear)
VCR/DVR OUT, TAPE OUT, PRE OUT
(FRONT, CENTER, SUBWOOFER,
SURR, SURR BACK, ZONE 2, ZONE 3)
Component Video
Frequency Response
Multichannel Pre
Outputs
Subwoofer Pre Outputs
Speaker Outputs
5 Hz – 100 MHz, –3 dB
7
1
ZONE 2 R, SURR BACK R, FRONT R,
SURR R, CENTER, SURR L, FRONT L,
SURR BACK L, ZONE 2 L
Tuner Section
■ FM
Tuning Frequency Range
North American:
Phones
1
87.5 MHz– 107.9 MHz
■ Control Terminal
MIC
European and Asian: 87.50 MHz– 108.00 MHz, RDS
Yes
RS232
IR Input/Output
12 V Trigger Out
1
1/1
1
■ AM
Tuning Frequency Range
North American:
European:
Others:
530 kHz–1710 kHz
522 kHz–1611 kHz
522/530 kHz–1611/1710 kHz
40
Preset Channel
Specifications and features are subject to change without
notice.
■ Digital Tuner
North American:
XM, SIRIUS, HD RADIO
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications (TX-NR906)
Amplifier Section
General
Rated Output Power
North American:
Power Supply
North American:
European:
Asian:
Power Consumption
North American:
European and Asian: 1000 W
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
AC 220-240 V, 50 Hz
AC 120/220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
145 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a
maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05% (FTC)
175 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC)
185 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 6 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.1% (FTC)
9.8 A
435 × 194 × 458.5 mm
17-1/8"
×
7-5/8"× 18-1/16"
European:
Weight
North American:
7 ch × 220 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)
24.5 kg
54.0 lbs.
Asian:
7 ch × 220 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)
European and Asian: 24.3 kg
53.6 lbs.
Maximum Output Power
Asian:
■ Video Input
7 ch × 280 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (JEITA)
HDMI
IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4
IN 1 (DVD), IN 2, IN 3
Dynamic Power
400 W (3 Ω, Front)
300 W (4 Ω, Front)
180 W (8 Ω, Front)
Component
S-Video
DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX 1, AUX 2
DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX 1, AUX 2
THD (Total Harmonic
Distortion)
Damping Factor
Composite
0.05% (Power Rated)
60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8 Ω)
Input Sensitivity and
Impedance
■ Video Output
HDMI
Component
S-Video
200 mV/ 47 kΩ (LINE)
2.5 mV/47 kΩ (PHONO MM)
OUT MAIN, OUT SUB
MONITOR OUT
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT,
ZONE 2 OUT
Output Level and
Impedance
Phono Overload
Frequency Response
Tone Control
200 mV/ 470 Ω (REC OUT)
70 mV (MM 1 kHz, 0.5%)
5 Hz–100 kHz/ +1 dB–3 dB (Direct mode)
10 dB, 20 Hz (BASS)
10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A)
Composite
■ Audio Inputs
Digital Inputs
OPTICAL: 2 (Rear), 1 (Front)
COAXIAL: 3 (Rear)
MULTI CH (FRONT, CENTER,
SUBWOOFER, SURR, SURR BACK),
DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX 1, TAPE, CD, PHONO, AUX 2
Signal to Noise Ratio
Speaker Impedance
Analog Inputs
4 Ω – 16 Ω
Video Section
Multichannel Inputs
7.1
Input Sensitivity/Output
Level and Impedance
1 Vp-p /75 Ω
(Component and S-Video Y)
0.7 Vp-p /75 Ω (Component Pb/Cb,Pr/Cr)
0.28 Vp-p /75 Ω (S-Video C)
1 Vp-p /75 Ω (Composite)
■ Audio Outputs
Digital Output
Analog Outputs
OPTICAL: 1 (Rear)
VCR/DVR OUT, TAPE OUT, PRE OUT
(FRONT, CENTER, SUBWOOFER,
SURR, SURR BACK, ZONE 2, ZONE 3)
Component Video
Frequency Response
Multichannel Pre
Outputs
Subwoofer Pre Outputs
Speaker Outputs
5 Hz – 100 MHz, –3 dB
7
1
ZONE 2 R, SURR BACK R, FRONT R,
SURR R, CENTER, SURR L, FRONT L,
SURR BACK L, ZONE 2 L
Tuner Section
■ FM
Tuning Frequency Range
North American:
Phones
1
87.5 MHz– 107.9 MHz
■ Control Terminal
MIC
European and Asian: 87.50 MHz– 108.00 MHz, RDS
Yes
Ethernet
RS232
IR Input/Output
12 V Trigger Out
USB
1
1
1/1
1
■ AM
Tuning Frequency Range
North American:
European:
Others:
530 kHz–1710 kHz
522 kHz–1611 kHz
522/530 kHz–1611/1710 kHz
40
Yes (1)
Preset Channel
■ Digital Tuner
North American:
XM, SIRIUS, HD RADIO
Specifications and features are subject to change without
notice.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sales & Product Planning Div. : 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8163
ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY
ONKYO EUROPE UK Office
Suite 1, Gregories Court, Gregories Road, Beaconsfield, Buckinghamshire, HP9 1HQ
UNITED KINGDOM Tel: +44-(0)1494-681515 Fax: +44(0)-1494-680452
HOMEPAGE
ONKYO CHINA LIMITED
Unit 1&12, 9/F, Ever Gain PlazaTower 1, 88, Container Port Road, Kwai Chung,
N.T., HONG KONG Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039
Y0807-2
SN 29344753A
(C) Copyright 2008 ONKYO CORPORATION Japan. All rights reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
* 2 9 3 4 4 7 5 3 A *
|
Network Technologies Switch SM 8X4 HDA User Manual
Nexus 21 TV Antenna NX2600 User Manual
Nikon Camera Lens 25101 User Manual
Numark Industries DJ Equipment SM 3 User Manual
Omron Home Theater Server C200HW ZW3AT2 E V2 User Manual
Onkyo Stereo Receiver TX SR502 User Manual
OWI Portable Speaker LGS170 User Manual
Panasonic Blood Pressure Monitor EW3109 User Manual
Panasonic Computer Drive CF VFS371 User Manual
Panasonic Digital Camera AK HC1800N User Manual